JP6901663B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention executes a variable display game in which identification information is variablely displayed based on a prize in the starting winning opening, and when the result of the variable display game is a special result, a special gaming state advantageous to the player is generated. Regarding the game machine to play.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In this pachinko machine, a plurality of identification information (designs, symbols, etc.) are variablely displayed on a display device provided in the game area based on the fact that the game ball wins a prize in the start port provided in the game area (starting prize). The variable display game is displayed. Further, there is also known a gaming machine capable of executing two types of special figure variation display games, special figure 1 and special figure 2 (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-12534

In the game machine described in Patent Document 1, it is impossible to increase the interest of Yu technique sufficiently. An object of the present invention is to improve the interest of a game.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1 is
In a gaming machine that executes a variable display game that fluctuates and displays identification information based on a prize in the start winning opening, and generates a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result. ,
A game control means capable of executing the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening, and
Based on the control command from the game control means, the first decorative variation display game corresponding to the variation display game and the effect control means capable of displaying the second decoration variation display game on the display device are provided.
The game control means acquires a variation pattern table, selects a variation pattern from the acquired variation pattern table, and selects a variation pattern.
The variation pattern table used for selecting the variation pattern of the variation display game, which is a specific effect state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, has a higher reach than the variation pattern table used for selecting the variation pattern of the variation display game, which is not in the specific effect state. It is assumed that the selection rate of the fluctuation pattern that does not perform the production is high.
When a variation pattern that does not perform the reach effect is selected from the variation pattern table used for selecting the variation pattern of the variation display game that is in the specific effect state, the effect control means causes the player to operate the operation means. The instruction display for intervening in the production is performed, and the second decoration variation display game is displayed on the second display based on the operation of the operation means in the state where the second decoration variation display game is displayed on the second display unit. is without effect for moving the first display portion from part to display the results of the second decorative variation display game on the first display portion, the second ornament variable display games subsequently displayed on the first display unit characterized in that a result from the first display portion is not moved to the second display unit.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a perspective view which looked at the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a figure explaining the structure of a batch display device. FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of the special figure 1 display. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of the special figure 2 display. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of the special figure 2 display. It is a figure explaining the structure of a special result. It is a figure explaining the kind of fluctuation pattern. It is a figure explaining the kind of fluctuation pattern. It is a figure explaining the opening / closing pattern of a special variable winning device. It is a figure explaining the opening / closing pattern of a special variable winning device. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a game machine. It is a flowchart explaining the main process. It is a flowchart explaining the main process. It is a flowchart explaining the checksum calculation process. It is a flowchart explaining the initial value random number update process. It is a flowchart explaining the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart explaining an input process. It is a flowchart explaining a switch reading process. It is a flowchart explaining an output process. It is a flowchart explaining the payout command transmission process. It is a flowchart explaining the random number update process 1. It is a flowchart explaining the random number update process 2. It is a flowchart explaining the winning opening switch / state monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining fraud & prize-winning monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining the winning number counter update process. It is a flowchart explaining the effect command setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the game machine state check process. It is a flowchart explaining the payout busy signal check process. It is a flowchart explaining the start port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a hard random number acquisition process. It is a flowchart explaining the common processing of a special figure start port switch. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure hold information determination process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart illustrating game processing. Special Figure 2 It is a flowchart explaining game processing. It is a flowchart explaining the big prize opening switch monitoring process. Special Figure 1 It is a flowchart explaining the usual processing. Special Figure 2 It is a flowchart explaining the usual processing. FIG. 1 is a flowchart illustrating a variation start process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart illustrating a fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the small hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a 2-byte distribution process. It is a flowchart explaining the sorting process. It is a flowchart explaining the fluctuation start information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the high probability fluctuation number update process. Special FIG. 1 is a flowchart illustrating a process transition setting process during fluctuation. Special FIG. 2 is a flowchart illustrating a process transition setting process during fluctuation. FIG. 1 is a flowchart illustrating processing during fluctuation. FIG. 2 is a flowchart illustrating processing during fluctuation. It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process 1 during display of special figure 1. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2. It is a flowchart explaining the process during display of special figure 1. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining the process during display of special figure 1. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 display process. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 display process. It is a flowchart explaining the fanfare / inter-interval process transition setting process. Special FIG. 1 is a flowchart illustrating a process transition setting process during small hit fanfare. Special FIG. 2 is a flowchart illustrating a process transition setting process during small hit fanfare. It is a flowchart explaining the processing during a fanfare / interval. It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process 1 during opening of a big winning opening. It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process 2 during opening of a big winning opening. It is a flowchart explaining the process during opening of a big winning opening. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot operation transition setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the processing of the remaining ball of a large winning opening. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot end processing transition setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the process in small hit fanfare. It is a flowchart explaining the process during a small hit. It is a flowchart explaining the small hit residual sphere processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 small hit end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 small hit end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the symbol variation control process. It is a flowchart explaining the segment LED editing process. It is a flowchart explaining the magnet fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining the board radio wave fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining the external information editing process. It is a flowchart explaining the start port 1 signal editing process. It is a flowchart explaining the main prize ball signal editing process. It is a flowchart explaining the symbol fixed number signal editing process. It is a figure explaining the display mode in a display device. It is a figure explaining the display mode at the time of switching of the main variation symbol. It is a figure explaining the display mode of a skip effect. It is a time chart explaining the skip effect. It is a flowchart explaining the main process. It is a flowchart explaining the skip effect processing. It is a flowchart explaining the display switching process. It is a figure explaining the modification of the display. It is a figure explaining the fluctuation pattern table in the 1st modification. It is a figure explaining the fluctuation pattern table in the 1st modification. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure information setting process in 1st modification.

<First Embodiment>
As shown in FIG. 1, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be openable and rotatable. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is housed in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, a glass frame 15 (transparent plate holding frame) provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

In addition, lamps, LEDs, etc. are built into the left and right sides of the glass frame 15 for decoration and production, and notification when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a payout abnormality occurs, the lamp, LED, etc. are displayed in an abnormality notification color (for example, red). A frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (blinking) with (), and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, sound effect) are provided. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is also provided below the front frame 12. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the abnormality content is notified by voice from the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b. A lamp for notifying the payout abnormality may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

Further, in the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper plate 21 (storage plate) for supplying a game ball to a hitting ball launching device (not shown) and a game ball paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the game machine 10 are arranged. The outflowing upper plate ball outlet 22, the lower plate (receiver) 23 for storing the game balls paid out when the upper plate 21 is full, the operation unit 24 of the hitting ball launching device, and the like are provided. Further, the upper edge portion of the upper plate 21 is provided with an effect button 25 having a built-in effect button switch 25a for receiving a pressing operation input from the player. Further, a touch panel 29 for receiving a contact operation input from the player is provided on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25. Further, on the lower right side of the lower part of the front frame 12, a keyhole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided. In the present embodiment, the touch panel 29 is provided integrally with the effect button 25, but the touch panel 29 may be separate from the effect button 25. For example, a sub display device may be provided in the vicinity of the effect button 25. A touch panel 29 may be provided on the display surface of the sub display device.

Further, on the right side of the effect button 25, there is a ball lending button 27 that is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and an ejection button that is operated to eject the prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. 28. A balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card is provided. In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, when the player rotates the operation unit 24, the hitting ball launching device directs the gaming ball supplied from the upper plate 21 toward the gaming area 32 on the front surface of the gaming board 30. Fire. In addition, by operating the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29, the player can perform an effect in which the player's operation is intervened in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). It can be carried out.

Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of the present embodiment.

On the surface of the game board 30, a substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by an outer peripheral wall 31 is formed. The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and outer peripheral walls 31 provided at each of the four corners of the game board 30. Further, on the left side of the game area 32, a guide wall 491 is provided along the outer peripheral wall 31 to form a guide path 490 that guides the launched game ball to a predetermined position in the game area 32.

In the game area 32, a center case (game effect component) 40 having a display device 41 is arranged substantially in the center. The display device 41 is attached to a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position recessed from the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 is formed so as to surround the periphery of the display area of the display device 41, project forward from the display surface of the display device 41, and make it difficult for the game ball to jump from the surrounding game area 32.

The display device 41 (variable display device) is composed of, for example, a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) and a CRT (cathode ray tube). In the area (display area) where the image of the display screen can be displayed, information related to the game such as a plurality of identification information (special symbols), characters for directing the special figure variation display game, and background images for enhancing the effect of the effect is displayed. .. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variablely displayed (variablely displayed), and a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game is performed. In addition, an image for producing an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed on the display screen. Further, the center case 40 is provided with a board effect device 44 that produces a game by operating. The board effect device 44 can operate from the state shown in FIG. 2 toward the center of the display device 41.

On the right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a normal symbol start gate (normal figure start gate) 34 that gives a start condition of the normal figure variation display game is provided. The game ball that has won the normal drawing start gate 34 is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 12). Further, two general winning openings 35 are arranged on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32. The game balls that have won in these general winning openings 35 are detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 12).

Below the center case 40, the first start winning opening 36 (starting winning opening, starting winning area) and the second special figure changing display that give the start conditions of the first special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) are given. A winning device 90 is provided, which includes a second starting winning opening 97 (starting winning opening, starting winning area) that gives a start condition for the game (special figure 2 variable display game). The winning device 90 includes a distribution member 92 that alternately distributes the game ball flowing into the upper inflow port 91 into the first starting winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 97. The distribution member 92 can rotate about a rotation axis along the front-rear direction, and the direction of tilting changes depending on the weight of the inflowing game ball. The game balls are alternately distributed to the starting winning opening 97. The game ball winning the first starting winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 12), and the game ball winning the second starting winning opening 97 is detected by the starting opening 3 switch 97a (see FIG. 12). Detected by. Further, below the winning device 90, an out opening 30a for collecting game balls that have not won a prize in the winning opening or the like is provided.

Further, on the right side of the center case 40, a normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting winning area) that gives a start condition of the second special figure variation display game is provided. The ordinary variable winning device 37 includes a movable member 37b that can be opened by rotating the upper end side in a direction in which the upper end side falls to the right and can be converted into a state in which a game ball can easily flow in. It is almost vertical and holds a closed closed state (a state that is disadvantageous to the player) in which the game ball cannot flow in. Then, when the result of the normal figure fluctuation display game is in a predetermined stop display mode, the normal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 12) as a driving device rotates so that the upper end side falls to the right and normally fluctuates. The winning device 37 can be changed to an open state (a state advantageous for the player) in which the game ball easily flows into the winning device 37. The game ball that has won the ordinary variable winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 12). It should be noted that the normal variable winning device 37 may be able to win a prize even in the closed state, and may be harder to win in the closed state than in the open state.

On the right side of the normal variable winning device 37, a flow path 615 whose front side is covered with a transparent cover and communicates vertically is formed, and the game ball that did not win the normal variable winning device 37 goes down through the flow path 615. Flow down to. A guide portion 616 is provided below the flow path 615. The guide portion 616 has an inclined surface whose upper surface 617 descends to the left, and the upper surface 617 catches the game ball flowing downward and guides the game ball to the left where the special variable winning device 38 exists. Further, the guidance unit 616 is provided with an information display device 630 that displays information related to the special figure variation display game.

The information display device 630 has a first information display unit that displays the number of first start memories, which is the execution right of the first special figure variation display game, and a second start memory, which is the execution right of the second special figure variation display game. It is provided with a second information display unit that displays the number of. Further, the decorative special figure 1 variable display game corresponding to the 1st special figure variable display game is displayed by the 4th symbol separately from the decorative special figure variable display game displayed by the 1st to 3rd symbols on the display device 41. The decoration special figure 2 variation corresponding to the second special figure variation display game by the fourth symbol separately from the decoration special figure variation display game displayed by the third information display unit and the display device 41 by the first to third symbols. Display A fourth information display unit for displaying a game is provided.

The first information display unit and the second information display unit are each composed of two light emitting members, and the third information display unit and the fourth information display unit are each composed of one light emitting member. In the second display device, three of these six light emitting members are arranged side by side in two rows on the left and right. The upper two light emitting members in the right column form the first information display unit, and the upper two light emitting members in the left column form the second information display unit. Further, one lower light emitting member in the right column constitutes a third information display unit, and one lower light emitting member in the left column constitutes a fourth information display unit.

The first information display unit and the second information display unit are each composed of two light emitting members, and a design is provided so that the two light emitting members are related to each other around each information display unit. At first glance, it can be seen that one information display unit is composed of two light emitting members. Further, although the third information display unit and the fourth information display unit are each composed of one light emitting member, the designs around these information display units are designed so that they can be seen to be independent of each other. At first glance, it can be seen that the information display unit is composed of one light emitting member. The design around the light emitting member is considered to have a sense of unity with the design of the entire gaming machine so as not to spoil the aesthetic appearance. Further, the design around the light emitting member is not affixed with a sticker or the like, but is molded into a member constituting the guide portion 616, so that labor and cost in manufacturing can be reduced.

Further, in the lower right part of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a first special variable winning device (upper large winning opening) that can be converted into a state in which the game ball is not accepted and a state in which the game ball is easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. 38 is arranged. The first special variation winning device 38 has an attacker-type opening / closing member 38c that can be opened by rotating the upper end side in a direction in which the upper end side falls toward the front side, and what is the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game? The opening / closing member 38c is retracted from the closed state in which the opening / closing member 38c is closed (a closed state that is disadvantageous to the player) and can accept the game ball flowing down the game area 32 (advantageous to the player). State). That is, the first special variable winning device 38 includes an upper winning opening that is opened and closed by an opening / closing member 38c driven by an upper winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 12) as a driving device, and is in a special gaming state (based on a big hit). During the first special game state and the second special game state based on the small hit), the inflow of the game ball into the upper prize opening is facilitated by converting the upper prize opening from the closed state to the open state. , A predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. Inside the upper prize opening (winning area), the upper prize opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 12) is arranged as a detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the upper prize opening. Has been done.

Further, below the first special variable winning device 38, there is a second special variable winning device (lower large winning opening) 39 that can be converted into a state in which the game ball is not accepted and a state in which the game ball is easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. Are arranged. The second special variable winning device 39 has an attacker-type opening / closing member 39c that can be opened by rotating the upper end side in a direction in which the upper end side falls toward the front side, and what is the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game? An open state in which the opening / closing member 39c evacuates from a closed state in which the lower prize opening is closed (a closed state that is disadvantageous to the player) and can accept a game ball flowing down the game area 32 (advantageous for the player). State). That is, the second special variable winning device 39 includes a lower winning opening that is opened and closed by an opening / closing member 39c driven by a lower winning opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 12) as a driving device, and is in a special gaming state (based on a big hit). During the first special game state and the second special game state based on the small hit), the lower prize opening is changed from the closed state to the open state to facilitate the inflow of the game ball into the lower prize opening. , A predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. Inside the lower prize opening (winning area), a lower prize opening switch (count switch) 39a (see FIG. 12) is provided as a detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the lower prize opening. Has been done.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, of the gaming areas 32 in which the gaming ball flows down, the left area of the center case 40 is the left gaming area, and the right area of the center case 40 is the right gaming area. ing. Then, the player adjusts the firing force and launches the game ball to the left game area (so-called left-handed) to reach the first start winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 97, and the general winning opening 35 of the winning device 90. By launching a game ball into the game area on the right side (so-called right-handed), you can aim for a prize in the normal figure start gate 34, a normal variable winning device 37, a first special variable winning device 38, and a second special variable winning device. It is possible to aim for a prize in 39.

Further, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, the lower right of the game board 30), the display of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, which form the special figure variable display game, and various information are collectively displayed. A display device 50 is provided.

As shown in FIG. 3, the batch display device 50 is a special figure 1 display (first special figure fluctuation display unit) for a special figure 1 variable display game composed of a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) or the like. 51 (D1) and special figure 2 variable display game special figure 2 display (second special figure variable display unit) 52 (D2) and special figure 1 variable display game start memory number notification composed of LED lamps The special figure 1 hold indicator 54 (D11, D12) for special figure 2 and the special figure 2 hold indicator 55 (D13, D14) for notifying the start memory number of the special figure 2 variable display game are provided.

Further, the batch display device 50 has a round display unit 60 (D3 to D7) for displaying the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of times of opening and closing of the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39), and a time saving state (D3 to D7). The first game status display unit 76 (D9) that notifies whether or not the player is in a specific game state during normal electric support, and the first method that notifies the player's hitting method corresponding to the game situation among left-handed (normal) and right-handed. A second game status display unit 77 (D8) serving as a notification means is provided. Further, a third game state display unit (third game state display, probability state display unit) 78 (D17) is provided to display that the probability state of the jackpot is in the high probability state when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on. Has been done. Further, the batch display device 50 includes a normal map display 74 (D10, D18) for the normal map variation display game, and a normal map hold display 75 (D15, D16) for notifying the start storage number of the normal map variation display game. To be equipped.

The special figure variation display game on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 is centered, for example, during the execution of the variation display game, that is, while the decorative special figure variation display game is being performed on the display device 41. Flashes the segment to indicate that it is changing. The blinking cycle is set to, for example, 100 msec. In the case of the present embodiment, in the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display 51, as shown in FIG. 3 (b), it is provided on the lower right side of the 7-segment in addition to the central segment. The eighth segment is also blinking and driven to indicate that it is changing, so that the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be distinguished from each other. In addition, it may be displayed that the game is changing by sequentially displaying a plurality of identification information (special figure, special symbol) for displaying the special figure change display game. Then, when the result of the game is "off", for example, the central segment (in the case of special figure 1, the eighth segment on the lower right side in addition) is turned on as the result mode of the off, and the result of the game is In the case of "hit", the result mode (for example, a number or a symbol) other than the out-of-order result mode (for example, a number or a symbol) is turned on and the game result is displayed as the hit result mode (special result mode).

The special figure 1 hold indicator 54 determines the number of undigested balls (first start memory number = hold number) among the number of winning balls to the first start winning opening 36, which is a fluctuation start condition of the special figure 1 display 51. , As shown in FIG. 3C, a plurality of LEDs are turned off and turned on (blinking). The special figure 2 hold indicator 55 is the number of undigested balls among the number of winning balls to the normal variable winning device 37 and the second starting winning opening 97, which are the fluctuation starting conditions of the special drawing 2 display 52 (second starting memory). Number = number of holds) is displayed by turning off and turning on (blinking) a plurality of LEDs as shown in FIG. 3 (c). The round display unit 60 is composed of an LED lamp or the like, and all the LEDs are turned off when not in the special game state, and as shown in FIG. 3 (d), the round display unit 60 is selected according to the result during the special game state. Turn on the LED according to the number of rounds. The round display unit may be composed of a 7-segment type display.

As shown in FIG. 3E, the first game state display unit 76 turns on the LED when the time is shortened, and turns off the LED when the time is not shortened. As shown in FIG. 3 (e), the second game status display unit 77 turns off the LED in the case of a left-handed game situation (normal hitting), and in the case of a right-handed game situation (right-handed hitting). ) Turns on the LED. As shown in FIG. 3E, the third game state display unit 78 turns on the LED when the power is turned on in a high probability state, and turns off the LED when the power is not in the high probability state.

In the normal map variation display game on the normal map display 74, during the variable display of the normal map variation display game, the variation symbol numbers shown in FIG. 3 (g) are alternately changed and the two LEDs are alternately lit. Display that it is changing. Then, when the result is a hit, it lights up in a lighting mode according to the hit type to indicate that it is a hit, and when the result is a hit, the two LEDs are turned off to indicate that it is a miss. .. The normal figure hold indicator 75 determines the number of undigested balls (the number of normal figure start storage = the number of hold) among the number of balls passing through the normal figure start gate 34, which is a fluctuation start condition of the normal figure display 74, as shown in FIG. As shown in f), it is displayed by turning off and turning on (blinking) a plurality of LEDs.

FIG. 4 shows a display mode in the special figure 1 display 51. Special Figure 1 Fluctuation display During the fluctuation display of the game, the central segment and the eighth segment provided on the lower right side of the 7-segment are blinked at a cycle of 100 msec. Then, the result is displayed by lighting in a manner corresponding to the result at the end of the fluctuation time. In some cases, a plurality of lighting modes are associated with one result, and in this case, one of these lighting modes is selected by a random number or the like.

5 and 6 show the display mode of the special figure 2 display 52. Special Figure 2 Fluctuation display During the fluctuation display of the game, the central segment blinks at a cycle of 100 ms. Then, the result is displayed by lighting in a manner corresponding to the result at the end of the fluctuation time. In some cases, a plurality of lighting modes are associated with one result, and in this case, one of these lighting modes is selected by a random number or the like.

FIG. 7 shows the probabilities of big hits and small hits, the distribution probability of the big hit type when the big hit is won, and the distribution probability of the small hit type when the small hit is won. The big hit is a special result (first special result) with the operation of the condition device, and the small hit is a special result (second special result) without the operation of the condition device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs (stop display of the big hit symbol) in the special figure fluctuation display game, and when the condition device operates, for example, a big hit state occurs and it is the first as a special electric accessory. 1 It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39 is set (the accessory continuous operating device is activated). The fact that the condition device does not operate means that the above-mentioned flag is not set as in the case where the small hit lottery is won, for example. The "conditional device" may be a software means such as a flag that is turned on / off by software as described above, or a hardware means such as a switch that is turned on / off electrically. Further, "conditional device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of an electric accessory, and the same applies to this specification. It is used as a term that has a meaning.

The jackpot probability, which is the probability of a jackpot (first special result), is common to Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, and the probabilities in the normal gaming state, which is a low probability state, and the specific gaming state, which is a high probability state, are shown in the figures. The probability is as shown in 7 (a). The gaming machine of the present embodiment becomes a high-probability state after the end of the special gaming state (first special gaming state) based on the jackpot, and becomes a low-probability state when the special figure variation display game is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times in this case). It is configured to be. Further, regardless of which of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game results in a high probability state, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game Both are in a high probability state.

The small hit probability, which is the probability of a small hit (second special result), is as shown in FIG. 7 (b). This small hit probability is lower in Special Figure 2 than in Special Figure 1. As a result, small hits do not occur frequently and the flow of the game is not interrupted in the high probability state in which the special figure 2 variable display game is mainly executed. In addition, the small hit probability is always constant regardless of the gaming state and the big hit probability. In the big hit and small hit lottery, the big hit and the small hit will not be won in duplicate.

Further, FIG. 7 (c) shows the jackpot types that can be selected in the special figures 1 and 2, the special variable winning device that is opened for each jackpot type, and the distribution probability, and FIG. 7 (d) shows the special hit type. The small hit types that can be selected in FIGS. 1 and 2, the special variable winning device that is opened for each small hit type, the opening time, the number of opening times, and the distribution probability are shown. Regarding the 2R probability variation D1 of the special figure 2, it is almost impossible to expect the ball to come out, but since it is a big hit, the number of special figure variation display games that can be executed in a high probability state is set to 50 times again. In the special game state based on the 2R probability variation D1, the number of games that can be executed in the high probability state is added.

8 and 9 show fluctuation patterns of the special figure fluctuation display game. FIG. 8 shows the contents of the fluctuation pattern table in which the types and selectivity of fluctuation patterns in the normal gaming state (low probability state) are defined. A variation pattern table common to the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game is used.

FIG. 8A shows a variation pattern table used when the result is out of order and the number of start-up memories is 1 to 3. The starting memory number here is the total number of the first starting memory and the second starting memory. When the number of start-up memories is 4 or more, the selectivity of the variation pattern with a short variation time of 3000 m or 7000 ms without reach is increased, and the selectivity of the other variation pattern with a long variation time is decreased. It has been done.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes an advantageous gaming state (special gaming state) for the player when the special result mode is adopted, a part of the plurality of display results is already derived and displayed at a stage where the display is not yet derived. A display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the condition of the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is out of the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and the display result reaches the stage before the derivation display. Refers to a display mode that does not exist. Further, for example, a state in which variation display is performed by a plurality of variation display areas (so-called full rotation reach) while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are aligned is also included in the reach state. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It refers to a display state when at least a part of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition of the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas on the display device. After the display, when the variation display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle to display the result mode, the left and right variation display areas satisfy the conditions for the special result mode (for example,). The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the fluctuation display of all the fluctuation display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition of the special result mode in any two of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas is satisfied (for example, the same). The state in which the identification information is used, except for the special result mode) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variable-displayed from this reach state.

The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and as reach effects in which the possibility of deriving a special result mode is different (expected value is different), normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), and so on. Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premier reach are set. The expected value increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach. Further, this reach state is included in the variation display mode at least when the special result mode is derived (when it becomes a big hit) in the special figure variation display game. That is, it may be included in the variation display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variation display game (when it is out of order). Therefore, the state in which the reach state occurs is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

FIG. 8B shows a variation pattern table used when the result is a big hit (first special result). In the case of a big hit, the fluctuation pattern is selected regardless of the number of start memories. Also, in the case of a big hit, it is always in the reach state. FIG. 8C shows a variation pattern table used when the result is a small hit (second special result). The case of a small hit is the same as the case of a big hit, and the fluctuation pattern is selected regardless of the number of start memories. Also, even in the case of a small hit, it is always in the reach state.

FIG. 9 shows the contents of the fluctuation pattern table in which the types and selection rates of the fluctuation patterns in the specific gaming state (high probability state) are defined. A variation pattern table common to the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game is used.

FIG. 9A shows a variation pattern table used when the result is out of order and the number of start-up memories is 1 to 3. The starting memory number here is the total number of the first starting memory and the second starting memory. When the number of start-up memories is 4 or more, the selectivity of the variation pattern with a short variation time of 1000 m without reach or 2000 ms is increased, and the selectivity of the other variation pattern with a long variation time is decreased. It has been done. 9 (b) and 9 (c) show a variation pattern table used when the result is a big hit (first special result) and a variation pattern used when the result is a small hit (second special result). Shown the table. In the case of a big hit or a small hit, the fluctuation pattern is selected regardless of the number of starting memories.

10 and 11 show special in the special gaming state (first special gaming state) based on the big hit (first special result) and the special gaming state (second special gaming state) based on the small hit (second special result). The opening / closing pattern of the variable winning device is shown. FIG. 10 shows the opening / closing pattern of the special variable winning device in the big hit type and the small hit type that can be selected in the special figure 1 variable display game, and FIG. 11 shows the big hit type and small that can be selected in the special figure 2 variable display game. The opening / closing pattern of the special variable winning device for each hit type is shown.

For example, as shown in FIG. 10, when the jackpot type is a jackpot of 16R probability variation A1 in the special figure 1 variation display game, the first special variation winning device 38 is opened according to the special figure 1 upper prize opening opening / closing pattern 1. .. In the special figure 1 upper prize opening opening / closing pattern 1, after the fanfare period of 5000 ms, the opening period of 29000 ms is set in the first round (1R). After that, the rounds in which the 2000 ms interval period and the 29000 ms open period are set are repeated up to 16 rounds, and after the 11000 ms ending period elapses, the special gaming state ends.

The time described in the interval period and the ending period in each opening / closing pattern shown in FIGS. 10 and 11 is the time obtained by adding the remaining ball processing time and the interval time or the ending time. For example, the interval period in the special figure 1 upper prize opening opening / closing pattern 1 is 2000 ms, of which 1400 ms in the first half is the remaining ball processing time and 600 ms in the latter half is the interval time. Further, the ending period in the special drawing 1 upper prize opening opening / closing pattern 1 is 11000 ms, of which 1400 ms in the first half is the remaining ball processing time and 9600 ms in the latter half is the ending time.

Other opening and closing patterns are the fanfare period, opening period, interval period (including the remaining ball processing time) and ending period (including the remaining ball processing time) as shown in the figure, and the first special variable winning device according to this. The 38 or the second special variable winning device 39 is opened. The opening / closing pattern 5 of the special drawing 2 upper prize opening in FIG. 11 is configured by repeating the opening period of 27200 ms in 5R for 200 ms and closing for 1500 ms 11 times, and then opening for 25,000 ms. In addition, in any opening / closing pattern, if a specified number of prizes are won in each round, the opening period of the round ends at that point.

In addition, in the case of opening / closing patterns having the same opening / closing mode from the start to the middle of the special gaming state, such as the opening / closing patterns 1 to 3 of the special drawing 1 upper prize opening and the opening / closing patterns 2 and 3 of the special drawing 2 upper winning opening, the display is displayed. The effect of the device 41 may be the same so that it becomes difficult to distinguish the big hit type and the small hit type. Further, the information that enables the determination of the big hit type and the small hit type may be suggested or notified during the special game state.

In addition, when a big hit is executed by any of the opening and closing patterns 4 and 5 of the special figure 2 upper prize opening, whether or not the long opening round is executed again after the end of 4R (whether or not to continue) is produced. You may do it. In this case, for example, if the special figure 2 upper prize opening opening / closing pattern 4 is used, a short opening is performed from 5R to 16R, which is the final round, and the big hit ends. In the above-mentioned special figure 2, the long opening (25000 ms) is performed after the short opening that is substantially the same as the 5R to 16R of the large winning opening opening / closing pattern 4 is performed, and then the same long opening as up to 4R is resumed. .. Therefore, in the case of the special figure 2 upper prize opening opening / closing pattern 4, the time is between 5R and 15R, and in the case of the special figure 2 upper winning opening opening / closing pattern 5, the time is used during a plurality of short openings of 5R. If it is the special figure 2 upper prize opening opening / closing pattern 4, it notifies the result that the long opening does not resume (the big hit game does not continue), and if it is the special figure 2 upper winning opening opening / closing pattern 5. By notifying the result that the long opening is resumed (the jackpot game continues), the player's expectation may be fueled.

From the above, the special results include the first special result (big hit) that can generate the first special game state and the second special game that has a lower game value that can be given to the player than the first special game state. The second special result (small hit) that can generate the state is included.

In the following description, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure variable display game. Further, when the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, it is simply referred to as a decorative special figure variable display game. When the big hit (first special result) and the small hit (second special result) are not distinguished, it is simply referred to as a hit (special result). When the first special gaming state, which is a special gaming state based on a big hit, and the second special gaming state, which is a special gaming state based on a small hit, are not distinguished, it is simply referred to as a special gaming state.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by launching a gaming ball (pachinko ball) toward the gaming area 32 from a launching device (not shown). The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by the direction changing members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged in various places in the game area 32, and the general winning opening 35 and the winning device 90 are the first. One start winning opening 36, a second starting winning opening 97, a normal variable winning device 37, a first special variable winning device 38 or a second special variable winning device 39, or an out provided at the bottom of the game area 32. It flows into the mouth 30a and is discharged from the game area 32. Then, a game ball is placed in the general winning opening 35, the first starting winning opening 36 of the winning device 90, the second starting winning opening 97, the ordinary variable winning device 37, the first special variable winning device 38, or the second special variable winning device 39. When a prize is won, a number of prize balls corresponding to the types of winning openings are discharged from the payout unit controlled by the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 12) to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23 of the glass frame 15. ..

The winning balls to the first starting winning opening 36 are detected as the starting winning balls of the special figure 1 variable display game by the starting opening 1 switch 36a provided inside, and a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4) is used as the first starting memory. It is memorized up to the limit. Special Figure 1 When the game ball wins in the first start winning opening 36 while the variable display game can be started and the first start memory number is 0, the first start memory is generated with the generation of the start right. Is stored, the first start memory number is added by 1, and the special figure 1 variation display game is immediately started based on the first start memory, and at this time, the first start memory number is subtracted by 1. .. On the other hand, when the special figure 1 variable display game cannot be started immediately, for example, when the special figure 1 variable display game has already been played and the special figure 1 variable display game has not ended, or when the special game state is set. In addition, when the game ball wins in the first start winning opening 36, if the first start memory number is less than the upper limit number, the first start memory number is added by 1 and one first start memory is stored. .. Then, when the first special figure 1 variable display game can be started in a state where the first start memory number is 1 or more (the end of the previous special figure 1 variable display game or the end of the special game state), the first The number of start-up memories is subtracted by 1, and the special figure 1 variable display game is started based on the stored first start-up memory.

The winning ball to the second starting winning opening 97 is detected as the starting winning ball of the special figure 2 variable display game by the starting opening 3 switch 97a provided inside. Further, the winning ball to the normal variable winning device 37 is detected as the starting winning ball of the special figure 2 variable display game by the starting port 2 switch 37a provided inside. If there is a prize in the second start winning opening 97 or the normal variable winning device 37 in a state where the special figure 2 variable display game can be started, the special figure 2 variable display game is immediately executed based on the winning. .. Further, when the special figure 2 variable display game cannot be started immediately, for example, when the special figure 2 variable display game has already been played and the special figure 2 variable display game has not ended, or when the special game state is set. When the game ball wins the second start winning opening 97 or the normal variable winning device 37, if the second start memory number is less than the upper limit number, the second start memory number is added by 1 and the second start memory is one. It will be remembered. Then, when the special figure 2 variable display game can be started in the state where the second start memory number is 1 or more (the end of the previous special figure 2 variable display game or the end of the special game state), the second The number of start memories is subtracted by 1, and the special figure 2 variable display game is started based on the stored second start memory.

Further, when the start winning ball is detected, a jackpot random value, a jackpot symbol random value, and each fluctuation pattern random value are extracted as start memory information, and the extracted random value is in the game control device 100 (see FIG. 12). The special figure start memory is stored in the special figure storage area (a part of the RAM) up to a predetermined number of times (for example, up to 4 times for each of the first start memory and the second start memory). Then, the number of stored special figures start memory is displayed on the special figure 1 hold display 54 and the special figure 2 hold display 55 of the batch display device 50, and also on the display device 41 of the center case 40 as a decorative special figure. Displayed as a start memory display.

The game control device 100 plays a special figure 1 variation display game on the special figure 1 display 51 (first variation display device) based on the first start memory, and based on the second start memory, the special figure 2 display device A special figure 2 variation display game is played on 52 (second variation display device). The special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed at the same time, but while one special figure variable display game is being executed, the other special figure variable display game has a special result (big hit or small hit). If this happens, one of the special figure variation display games is terminated as a result other than the special result (missing result).

In the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, after performing variable display in the display mode as shown in FIGS. 4 and 5, a predetermined result mode as shown in FIGS. 4 to 6 is performed. Stop display. When the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 becomes a special result mode (big hit result mode) corresponding to the first special result. It becomes a big hit and becomes the first special game state (so-called big hit state). Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 corresponds to the second special result (small hit result mode). Then, it becomes a small hit and becomes a second special game state (so-called small hit state). That is, the special figure 1 display 51 serves as a first variable display means capable of displaying the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening 36. Further, the special figure 2 display 52 can display the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37 or the second starting winning opening 97. It serves as a display means.

In addition, in response to the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, a plurality of types of decorative identification information (numbers, symbols, character symbols, etc.) are variablely displayed on the display device (image display device) 41. The decoration special figure variation display game to be made to be executed is to be executed. The decorative special figure variable display game includes a decorative special figure 1 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game and a decorative special figure 2 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game, which will be described later. In addition, one set as the main display symbol is displayed larger than the other. Then, the variation display is performed according to the variation of the corresponding special figure variation display game, and the display corresponding to the result is performed according to the derivation of the result mode in the corresponding special figure variation display game.

That is, the display variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) in which the display device 41 variablely displays the decorative identification information corresponding to the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) and the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) (special figure 2 variable display game). It serves as a decorative variation display means that can display a decorative special figure variation display game). It should be noted that different display devices may be used for the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game, or only one of the decorative special figure variable display games may be displayed. Further, the game machine 10 may not be provided with the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, and the special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41.

Then, when a big hit occurs and a special game state is entered, the first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39 can be aimed at by right-handed. After the end of the special game state based on the jackpot, it becomes a specific game state which is a high probability state. In this specific game state, the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is a high probability state, which is a state higher than that of the normal probability state. In addition, regardless of the high probability state based on the result mode of either the 1st special figure fluctuation display game or the 2nd special figure fluctuation display game, the 1st special figure fluctuation display game and the 2nd special figure Both variable display games are in a high probability state.

Furthermore, in the specific game state, the time is shortened so that the probability of hitting the result of the normal map fluctuation display game (normal figure probability) is set to a higher probability (normal figure high probability state) than 0, which is the normal probability (normal figure low probability state). It becomes a state. As a result, the opening time of the ordinary variable winning device 37 per unit time is controlled to be longer than that in the case where the ordinary variable winning device 37 is in the low probability state of the normal figure. Here, in the normal variable winning device 37 in the present embodiment, the normal drawing probability is set to 0 so as not to open the movable member 37b in the normal gaming state.

Further, in the time saving state, the execution time of the normal map fluctuation display game (normal map fluctuation time) is, for example, 500 msec, and the normal map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is, for example, 600 msec. When the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened as a result of the normal fluctuation display game, the opening time (normal power opening time) and the number of times of opening (for example, 500 ms x 1 time) of the first hit stop symbol, Opening time (for example, 1700 ms x 2 times) of the second stop symbol, opening time (for example, 1700 ms x 2 times), opening time (for example, 1700 ms x 2) for the third stop symbol 3 times), it is possible to set.

In addition, the execution time, the normal figure stop time, the normal power opening number, and the normal power opening time of the normal figure fluctuation display game are appropriately set so as to control the normal fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 to be in a time-saving operation state. For example, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the execution time (normal figure fluctuation time) of the above-mentioned normal figure fluctuation display game to be a second fluctuation time shorter than the first fluctuation time. (For example, 10000 msec is 1000 msec). Further, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the normal figure stop time for displaying the result of the normal figure variation display game to be the second stop time shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 msec). 704msec). Further, in the time saving state, when the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened as a result of the normal fluctuation display game, the opening time (normal power opening time) is set to the normal state (normal figure low probability state). It is possible to control the second opening time to be longer than the first opening time (for example, 100 msec is 1352 msec). Further, in the time saving state, the number of times the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened (the number of times the normal electric power is opened) is larger than the number of times the first opening (for example, 2 times) is obtained for one hit result of the normal fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the number of times (for example, 4 times) to the second opening number of times. Further, in the time saving state, the probability of hitting the result of the normal map fluctuation display game (normal figure probability) is higher than the normal probability (normal figure low probability state, for example, 1/251) in the normal operating state. It is possible to set the probability (normally high probability state, for example, 250/251).

In the time saving state, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened by changing any one or more of the normal fluctuation time, the normal stop time, the number of times the normal power is opened, the normal power opening time, and the normal probability. Try to extend the conversion time longer than usual. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time saving states in which different things are changed. Further, when a hit occurs, either the first open mode or the second open mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first open mode and the second open mode may be different. Further, the high probability state and the time saving state can be generated independently, and both can be generated at the same time, or only one can be generated.

FIG. 12 is a block diagram of the control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100, and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that collectively controls a game, and a game microcomputer (hereinafter, referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. It is composed of a CPU unit 110 having a CPU unit 110, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, and the like, and a data bus 140 connecting the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130. ..

The CPU unit 110 includes a gaming microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and uses a CPU operating clock, a timer interrupt, and a clock that serves as a reference for a random number generation circuit. It has an oscillator circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 or the like to generate. A predetermined level of DC voltage such as DC32V, DC12V, DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 is supplied to the game control device 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100 to enable operation. Will be done.

The power supply device 400 is a normal power supply having an AC-DC converter that generates a DC voltage of DC32V from a 24V AC power supply, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V, DC5V, etc. from a voltage of DC32V. A power failure monitoring signal that has a unit 410, a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies a power supply voltage to the internal RAM of the game microcomputer 111 in the event of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and notifies the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of the power failure. A control signal generation unit 430 or the like that generates and outputs a control signal such as a reset signal or a reset signal is provided.

In this embodiment, the power supply unit 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control device 100, that is, the main unit. It may be configured to be provided on a substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are mounted on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the present embodiment. By providing the above, it is possible to reduce the cost by excluding it from the target of replacement.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or even after the power is cut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it drops to 17V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and changes the power failure monitoring signal, and also resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, the information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. Processing is done. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. A reset signal is a type of forced interrupt signal that resets the entire control system.

The game microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111B, and a RAM (random access memory) 111C that can be read and written at any time.

The ROM 111B non-volatilely stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control, and the RAM 111C stores the work area of the CPU 111A and various signals and random number values during game control. It is used as. As the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C, an electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as EEPROM may be used.

Further, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect content, the presence / absence of the occurrence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to refer to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start memory to determine the variation pattern. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a missed fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is missed, a jackpot fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Further, these pattern tables include a table for determining the latter half fluctuation pattern, which is a fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), and fluctuation before reaching the reach state. A table for determining the first half fluctuation pattern, which is a pattern (first half fluctuation group table, first half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.) is included.

The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, or generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. 10 Control the entire system. Further, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a jackpot random number for determining the hit of the special figure variation display game, a jackpot symbol random number for determining the jackpot symbol, and a variation pattern in the special figure variation display game (various types). A random number generation circuit for generating a variable pattern random number for determining (including the execution time of the variable display game in the variable display without reach or reach), a hit random number for determining the hit of the normal figure variable display game, etc. And a clock generator that generates a timer interrupt signal for the CPU 111A with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) and a clock that gives an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. There is.

Further, the CPU 111A acquires any one of the fluctuation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the process related to the special figure fluctuation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result (hit (big hit or small hit) or miss) of the special figure variation display game and the probability state (normal probability state or high probability) of the special figure variation display game as the current game state. State), the operating state of the normal variable winning device 37 as the current game state (time saving operation state (general power support state)), the number of start memories, etc., from a plurality of fluctuation pattern tables, any one of them. Select and acquire the fluctuation pattern table. Here, the CPU 111A serves as a variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when executing the special figure variation display game.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, ROM, RAM, input interface, output interface, etc., and drives the payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to drive the prize ball. Control to pay out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball lending request signal from the card unit, and controls for paying out the lending ball.

The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a panel radio wave sensor 62 that detects the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a starting port 1 switch 36a in the first starting winning opening 36, and a starting port 2 switch in the normal variable winning device 37. 37a, starting port 3 switch 97a in the second starting winning opening 97, gate switch 34a in the starting gate 34, winning opening switch 35a, upper large winning opening switch 38a in the first special variable winning device 38, second special It is connected to the lower grand prize opening switch 39a of the variable winning device 39, and a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from these switches is input to a positive logic signal of 0V-5V. An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 for conversion is provided. Since the input range of the proximity I / F121 is 7V-11V, the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch is illegally shorted, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is cut and floats. It is configured to be able to detect an abnormal state such as the above and output an abnormality detection signal.

The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the start port 3 switch 97a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, the upper winning opening switch 38a, and the lower winning opening switch 38a. The detection signal of 39a is input to the second input port 123. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124. Further, in the third input port 124, a detection signal of a magnetic sensor 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 or the like of the gaming machine 10 or a glass frame opening detection provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the gaming machine 10 is detected. The detection signal of the switch 63 and the detection signal of the main body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 of the gaming machine 10 are also input. A vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the gaming machine so that the detection signal is input to the third input port 124.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the main board 100 to the test firing test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, and the start port 3 switch 97a are input to the game microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123. It is configured.

As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12V in addition to a voltage such as 5V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It has become.

The data held by the second input port 123 is read out by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to an effective level) by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123. be able to. The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, the input unit 120 receives a frame radio wave illegal signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 detecting a radio wave) and a payout busy signal (payout control device). 200 indicates whether or not the command can be accepted), payout abnormality status signal (status signal indicating payout abnormality), shoot ball out switch signal (signal indicating shortage of game balls before payout), overflow switch signal (A signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (it is full)), and a touch switch signal (for input of a touch switch provided on the operation unit 24). A first input port 122 is provided which takes in (based on a signal) and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting a signal such as a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 or the like, and the Schmidt buffer 125 is provided with these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122, and are taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 that receive signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET whose noise has been removed by the Schmidt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RESET is output directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, so that the test firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 is turned off in order to output to the test firing test apparatus. It is configured as follows. Further, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RESET is not supplied to the ports 122, 123, and 124 of the input unit 120. The data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset in order to prevent system malfunction, but each of the input units 120 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the game microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the game microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. It should be noted that the one-way communication is such that a signal cannot be input to the game control device 100 from the effect control device 300 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data for notifying the special symbol information of the variable display game to the test firing test device of an accreditation body (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the jackpot, and the like via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. This buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass production product) installed in a game store. The detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a start port switch output from the proximity I / F 121, is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, a detection signal that cannot be supplied to the test firing test device as it is, such as the magnetic sensor 61 and the panel radio wave sensor 62, is once taken into the game microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, the game machine controls the game. It is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test firing test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 as an error signal indicating that the state cannot be achieved. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the switch detection signal that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selectively controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

Further, in the output unit 130, a solenoid (upper large winning opening solenoid) 38b connected to the data bus 140 to open the first special variable winning device 38 and a solenoid (lower large winning opening) opening the second special variable winning device 39. A second output port 134 for outputting open / close data of the solenoid (solenoid) 37c that opens the movable member 37b of the solenoid) 39b and the ordinary variable winning device 37 is provided. Further, the output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the batch display device 50, and the batch display device 50. A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

Further, the output unit 130 has a fifth output port 137 for outputting information related to the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information (big hit 1 signal, jackpot 2 signal, jackpot 3 signal and jackpot 4 signal) to the external information terminal board 71. It is provided. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game store, and can provide information about the game machine 10. It can be supplied to an external device. Further, a launch permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmidt buffer 132. That is, the game control device 100 serves as an output means for outputting information to the outside of the game machine.

Further, the output unit 130 receives the opening / closing data signals of the upper winning opening solenoid 38b, the lower winning opening solenoid 39b, and the general electric current solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal. Output from the first driver (drive circuit) 138a, the second driver 138b, which outputs the on / off drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the batch display device 50 output from the third output port 135, and the fourth output port 136. External information terminal board supplies external information signals to external devices such as management devices from the third driver 138c and fifth output port 137 that output the on / off drive signal of the digit line on the current draw-in side of the batch display device 50. A fourth driver 138d that outputs to 71 is provided.

DC32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138a so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. Further, DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment line of the batch display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit wire is for pulling out the digit wire corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A dynamic drive system in which a second driver 138b that outputs 12V causes a current to flow into the anode terminal of the LED via the segment wire, and a third driver 138c that outputs a ground potential draws a current from the cathode terminal via the segment wire. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs selected in sequence with, and the LEDs are turned on. The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71, supplies the external information signal with a level of 12V, so that DC12V is supplied. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to an external inspection device 450. The photocoupler 139 is configured so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can communicate with the inspection device 450 by serial communication. Since such data transmission / reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the first starting winning opening 36, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, and the starting port 3 in the second starting winning opening 97 The switch 97a, the winning opening switch 35a, the upper winning opening switch 38a, and the lower winning opening switch 39a are provided with a coil for magnetic detection, and a game ball is played by utilizing the phenomenon that the magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil. A non-contact magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) for detection is used. Further, the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the gaming machine 10 and the main body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 or the like are microswitches having mechanical contacts. Can be used.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG.
The effect control device 300 is for displaying images on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 composed of an amusement chip (IC) and the main control microcomputer 311 like the game microcomputer 111. It is provided with a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 that controls sound output in order to reproduce various melody and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

The main control microcomputer 311 stores a program ROM 321 composed of a program executed by the CPU and a PROM (programmable read-only memory) storing various data, a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and stored contents even if power is not supplied in the event of a power failure. A FeRAM 323 that can be held and an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that serves as a timing means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands from the game microcomputer 111, determines the production content, instructs the VDP 312 about the content of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 of the reproduced sound, lights the decorative lamp, and the motor. And the drive control of the solenoid, the management of the production time, and so on.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging / reducing an image. Further, the VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used for developing and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By sending and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be sent in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311 are a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the video of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing. STS is input. It should be noted that the VDP 312 informs the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in VRAM. The wait signal WAIT and the like for this is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by an LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is transmitted to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

An audio ROM 327 in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are connected via the address / data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and the sound source LSI 314. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. An effect control command signal (effect command) is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 via this command I / F331, such as a decorative special figure hold number command, a decorative special figure command, a variation command, and a stop information command. ). Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC 5 V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3 V, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function. There is.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40) and an information display device 630. , A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, a frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the glass frame 15, and a game board 30 (including a center case 40). A board effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided to drive and control the board effect device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances the effect effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41). These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340. Even if the glass frame 15 is provided with a frame effect device provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for effect) and is provided with a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device. good.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 29 provided on the glass frame 15, an initial position of a motor in the board effect device 44, and the like. The function of detecting the on / off state of the effect switch 47 (effect motor switch) and inputting the detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300. A switch input circuit 336 is provided to detect the above and input the detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 drives a motor or a solenoid in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above configuration and the electronic components controlled by the effect control device 300. DC32V, display device 41 consisting of liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving motors and LEDs, DC5V for driving command I / F331, and DC15V for driving motors, LEDs, and speakers. It is configured to do. Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, DC-for generating DC3.3V or DC1.2V based on DC5V A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in the reset state. Further, the VDP 312 (VDP RESET signal), the sound source LSI 314, the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving the speaker, and the control circuit 332-334 (IOReSET) for driving and controlling the lamp and the motor are output from the main control microcomputer 311. It is supplied to the signal) and puts them in the reset state. Further, a cooling FAN 45 for cooling various parts of the gaming machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

In these control circuits, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 1 switch 36a provided in the first start winning port 36, the random value for jackpot determination of the special figure 1 variation display game is extracted. The first start memory is stored in the RAM 111C. The jackpot determination random value or the like in the first start memory is compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process of determining the hit / miss or variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game is performed. Further, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variable winning device 37 and the starting port 3 switch 97a provided in the second starting winning opening 97, the special figure 2 variable display game The second start storage is stored in the RAM 111C by extracting the random value for determining the jackpot. The jackpot determination random value or the like in the second start memory is compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process of determining the hit / miss or variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game is performed.

Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game to the effect control device 300. Then, after the identification symbol (identification information) is variablely displayed for a predetermined time on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, a process of displaying the special figure variation display game that is stopped and displayed is performed. That is, the game control device 100 of the variable display game is based on the winning of the starting winning area (first starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37, second starting winning opening 97) of the game ball flowing down the game area 32. It serves as a game control means for controlling the progress.

Further, the effect control device 300 performs a process of displaying the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game on the display device 41 based on the control signal from the game control device 100. Further, the effect control device 300 performs processing such as setting the effect state, outputting sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, and controlling light emission of various LEDs based on the control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as an effect control means for controlling the effect related to the game (variable display game, etc.).

Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit or a small hit, and also displays the special result mode and the special game. Performs processing to generate a state. In the process of generating the special game state, the CPU 111A opens the opening / closing member 38c of the first special variable winning device 38 by, for example, the upper prize winning opening solenoid 38b, and enables the game ball to flow into the upper winning opening. Control to do. Alternatively, the lower special winning opening solenoid 39b opens the opening / closing member 39c of the second special variable winning device 39 to control the inflow of the game ball into the lower winning opening.

Then, the large winning opening is opened until either a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls wins the large winning opening or a predetermined opening time elapses from the opening of the large winning opening. Opening is defined as one round, and control (cycle game) is performed in which this is continued (repeated) a predetermined number of rounds. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a large winning opening opening / closing control means for controlling the opening / closing of the large winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of alignment, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are controlled to display the result mode of the deviation.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a specific game state as a game state after the end of the special game state based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. This specific gaming state is a high-probability state and a time-saving state (general power support state). It should be noted that only one of the high-probability state and the time-saving state may be generated, or neither may be generated (low-probability state and no time-saving).

Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the game microcomputer 111 mainly includes the main process shown in FIGS. 14 and 15 and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 18 performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIG. 14, first, the process of disabling interrupts (step X1) is performed, and then the stack pointer, which is the start address of the area for saving the value of the register or the like when an interrupt occurs. The stack pointer setting process (step X2) for setting is performed. Next, register bank 0 is specified (step X3), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step X4). In the case of the present embodiment, the range of the RAM address is 0000h to 01FFh, 00h or 01h is taken as the upper rank, and the first 00h is set in step X4. Next, the launch stop signal is output and the launch permission signal is set to the prohibited state (step X5). The launch permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a launch stop signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited.

After that, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) is read (step X6), and a process of setting the power-on delay timer is performed (step X7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, a program of a slave control means (for example, a payout control device 200 or an effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to an instruction from a game control device 100 that serves as a main control means A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for normal startup is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily starts up first and sends a command to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device Can avoid missing commands. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the start of the slave control devices (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.). It serves as a waiting means for setting the waiting time.

Further, the power-on delay timer is timed by using a storage area (a RAM area or a register that is not subject to the validity judgment) that is not subject to the validity judgment (checksum calculation) of the RAM. As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of a RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area for calculation, so that it is possible to prevent the control at the time of power-on from becoming complicated.

An initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122, and by reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time, the operation of the initialization switch 112 is ensured. Can be detected. That is, if the state of the initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the initialization switch 112 is operated after the standby time has elapsed, or the initialization switch 112 is operated from the power-on until the standby time has elapsed. You need to keep doing it. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, it can be detected by performing the operation immediately after turning on the power without performing such annoying operation, and the initialization operation performed at the time of turning on the power. Can be prevented from being unacceptable.

After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step X7), the process of timing the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (steps X8 to X12) is performed. First, the number of times (for example, twice) to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus is set (step X8), and it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on. Do (step X9).

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step X9; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks set in step X8 (step X10). Then, when the power failure monitoring signal has not been turned on for the number of checks (step X10; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step X9). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously turned on for the number of checks (step X10; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the power of the gaming machine is waited to be cut off. In this way, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent false detection of a power failure due to noise or the like, and appropriately deal with problems when the power is turned on. can do.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to deal with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power cutoff are retained, so backup processing etc. is performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step X9; N), that is, when a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step X11), and whether the timer value is 0 or not. Is determined (step X12). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step X12; N), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of times the power failure monitoring signal is checked (step X8). When the timer value is 0 (step X12; Y), that is, when the standby time has expired, access permission is granted to the read / write RWM (read / write memory) such as RAM or EEPROM (step X13). ), Output off-data to all output ports (set to no output) (step X14).

Next, a serial port (a port previously mounted on the gaming microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) is set (step X15) and read first. However, it is determined from the state of the first input port 122 whether the initialization switch is turned on (step X16).

When the initialization switch is off (step X16; N), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah) (step X17), and it is normal. If (step X17; Y), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step X18). Then, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step X18; Y), a checksum calculation process for calculating the checksum of the predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step X19), and the calculated checksum and the power are turned off. It is determined whether the checksums of are matched (step X20). When the checksums match (step X20; Y), the process proceeds to step X21 of FIG. 15 and a process is performed when the checksum is normally restored from the power failure.

Further, when it is determined that the initialization switch is on (step X16; Y), or when it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step X17; N or step X18; N). If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (step X20; N), the process proceeds to step X23 of FIG. 15 to perform initialization processing. That is, the initialization switch serves as an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Make.

In step X21 of FIG. 15, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (step X21). The areas to be initialized here are a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. The busy signal flag area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept the command, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. It is in an indefinite state. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area that stores the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and the state of the touch switch signal is set to an indefinite state indicating that the state has not been determined.

After that, a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the special figure status prepared for rationally executing the special figure game processing described later is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X22), and the step. Proceed to X28. In the case of the present embodiment, in step X22, a plurality of commands such as a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a probability information command, and a screen designation command are transmitted. As the screen designation command, if both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are in the normal processing described later, that is, the special figure variation display game is not being executed and the special game state is not being executed, the customer is waiting. Send the command of the waiting demo screen, otherwise send the command of the recovery screen. In addition to these commands, depending on the model, a production count information command and a high probability count information command are also transmitted.

On the other hand, when jumping from steps X16, X17, X18, X20 to step X23, the RAM access prohibited area is set to access permission (step X23), and all the areas including the busy signal flag area and the touch switch signal state monitoring area are included. The RAM area is cleared to 0 (step X24), and the RAM access prohibited area is set to access prohibited (step X25). Then, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step X26). The area to be initialized here is a customer waiting demo area and an area related to the setting of the production mode. Then, the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X27), and the process proceeds to step X28. In the case of this embodiment, in step X27, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a probability information command, and a RAM initialization command (a customer waiting demo screen is displayed and light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds)). Sends multiple commands such as (command to notify RAM initialization). In addition to these commands, depending on the model, a production count information command and a high probability count information command are also transmitted.

In step X28, a process of activating a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator has a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) with respect to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. It also includes a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that triggers a random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After the CTC activation process in step X28, a process for activating and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step X29). Specifically, the CPU 111A sets a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. In addition, the bit transposition pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set. The bit transposition pattern is a method of exchanging the extracted random number bits (arrangement before the upper bit transposition) in a predetermined order and storing them as different bit arrangements (arrangement after the lower bit transposition). It is a pattern that determines. By exchanging the bits of the random number according to this bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. In addition, the user may be able to set it arbitrarily.

After that, the values of the predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of turning on the power are extracted, and the corresponding initial value random numbers (in the case of this embodiment, the random numbers that determine the hit symbol of the special figure). After saving in a predetermined area of the RWM as the initial value (start value) of (big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number) (step X30), the interrupt is permitted (step X31). In the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the present embodiment, the initial value of the soft random number register is configured to change each time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to acquire an illegal random number.

Subsequently, the initial value random number update process (step X32) for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers is performed. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are configured to be generated by using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock whose speed is equal to or higher than the operating clock of the CPU, and the jackpot symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number are the timer interrupt processing that is the processing unit of the program. It is a "low-speed counter" that is updated based on the CTC output having the same cycle (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of timer interrupt processing). Further, in the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number, a so-called "initial value change method" is adopted in which the start value is changed by using each initial value random number (generated by software) every time the random number goes around. It should be noted that each of the random numbers may be a counter-type update by +1 or -1, or a random-type update in which all the values in the range appear separately without duplication until one cycle is completed. That is, the jackpot random number is a random number updated only by the hardware, and the jackpot symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers updated by the hardware and software.

After the initial value random number update process in step X32, the number of times (for example, twice) to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus is set (step X33), and the power failure occurs. It is determined whether the monitoring signal is on (step X34). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step X34; N), the process returns to the initial value random number update process (step X32). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update process and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop process) are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (step X32) (step X31), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed, and the timer interrupt is executed. It is possible to prevent the interrupt processing from being overwhelmed by waiting for the initial value random number update processing.

In addition to the main process, the initial value random number update process in step X32 may be performed in the timer interrupt process as well. If such a method is adopted, both are initially used. In order to avoid executing the value random number update process, when the initial value random number update process is performed in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update to release the interrupt. If the initial value random number update processing is not performed in the timer interrupt processing and only in the main processing, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update processing, which causes the main processing. It has the advantage of being simplified.

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step X34; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks set in step X33 (step X35). Then, when the power failure monitoring signal has not been turned on for the number of checks (step X35; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step X34). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks (step X35; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the process of temporarily disabling interrupts (step X36), all. The process of outputting off-data to the output port (step X37) is performed.

After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step X38), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step X39). Further, after performing a checksum calculation process (step X40) for calculating the checksum when the power of the RWM is turned off and a process (step X41) for saving the calculated checksum, a process for prohibiting access to the RWM (step X42). ), And then wait for the power of the gaming machine to be turned off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is turned off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power is cut off is correctly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

From the above, a main control means (game control device 100) that comprehensively controls the game and a sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) that perform various controls according to instructions from the main control means, etc. ), The main control means is a standby means (game control device) that delays the activation of the main control means and sets a predetermined standby time for waiting for the activation of the slave control device when the power is turned on. 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined standby time are provided.

Further, a power supply device 400 for supplying electric power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) is , It is determined that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is based on the fact that the RAM 111C capable of storing data, the initialization operation unit (initialization switch) capable of being operated from the outside, and the initialization operation unit are operated. An initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing the data stored in the RAM 111C is provided, and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the standby time.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is configured to allow access to the RAM 111C after the standby time has elapsed.

[Checksum calculation process]
FIG. 16 shows the checksum calculation process (steps X19, X40) in the above-mentioned main process. In this checksum calculation process, first, the start address of the RWM is set as the start value of the calculated address (step X51), the number of repetitions is set (step X52), and "0" is set as the calculated value (step X53). .. The number of bytes of the RAM used is set in the number of repetitions.

After that, the value obtained by adding the calculated value to the contents of the calculated address is used as a new calculated value (step X54), the calculated address is updated by +1 (step X55), the number of repetitions is updated by -1 (step X56), and the checksum is checked. It is determined whether or not the calculation of is completed (step X57). If the calculation is not completed (step X57: N), the process returns to step X54 and the above process is repeated. When the calculation is completed (step X57: Y), the checksum calculation process is completed.

[Initial value random number update process]
FIG. 17 shows the initial value random number update process (step X32) in the above-mentioned main process. In this initial value random number update process, first, the big hit symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (step X61), the small hit symbol initial value random number 1 is updated by +1 (step X62), and the initial value random number update process is completed. Here, the "big hit symbol initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the jackpot stop symbol in the special symbol variation display game, and the "small hit symbol initial value random number" is the special symbol variation display game. It is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the small hit stop symbol. In this way, the randomness of the random numbers can be increased by continuing to increment the initial value random numbers as long as time allows in the main processing.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. The timer interrupt process is started by inputting a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator to the CPU 111A. That is, it is an interrupt routine that is started in a predetermined cycle. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 18 is started.

When the timer interrupt processing is started, first, the register bank 1 is specified (step X101). By switching to the register bank 1, it is equivalent to performing a register save process of transferring the value held in a predetermined register (for example, the register used in the main process) to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, the D register) (step X102). In step X102, the same processing as in step X4 in the main processing is performed, but the register banks are different. Next, input from various sensors and switches and signal acquisition, that is, input processing (step X103) for reading the state of each input port is performed. Then, based on the output data set in various processes, output processing (step X104) for performing drive control of actuators such as solenoids (upper prize winning opening solenoid 38b, lower winning opening solenoid 39b) is performed. When the firing stop signal is output in step X5 in the main processing, the firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permitted state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, the signal is not processed. Further, the launch permission signal is the first signal indicating the launch permission status as seen from the game control device, and the second signal (launch permission signal) indicating the launch permission status as seen from the payout control device is also payout control. Generated in the device and output to the launch control device. That is, when two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device and both are permitted to launch, the game ball is configured to be ready for launch.

Next, the payout command transmission process (step X105), the random number update process 1 (step X106), and the random number update process 2 (step X107) for outputting the commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200 are performed. After that, whether or not there is a normal signal input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the starting port 3 switch 97a, the winning port switch 35a, the upper winning opening switch 38a, and the lower winning opening switch 39a. The winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step X108) for monitoring and monitoring errors (whether the front frame or the glass frame is open, etc.) is performed.

Next, a start port switch monitoring process (step X109) for monitoring the winning of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, and the start port 3 switch 37a is performed. In the start port switch monitoring process, various random numbers (big hit random numbers, etc.) are extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, and the second starting winning opening 97. Then, the special figure 1 game process (step X110) for processing the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 game process (step X111) for performing the special figure 2 variable display game are performed.

Next, a segment LED editing process (step X112), which is provided in the game machine 10 and drives a segment LED for displaying a special figure variation display game and various information related to the game so as to display desired contents, a magnetic sensor 61. Magnet fraud monitoring process (step X113) that checks the detection signal from the sensor and determines whether there is an abnormality, and the panel radio error that checks the detection signal from the panel radio sensor 62 and determines whether there is an abnormality. The monitoring process (step X114) is performed. Further, an external information editing process (step X115) for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer is performed to end the timer interrupt process.

Here, in the present embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting interrupts) and the process of restoring the register bank designation (that is, the process of specifying register bank 0) are interrupt return processes. It is automatically performed at the time (at the end of timer interrupt processing). Depending on the CPU used, some gaming machines need to be instructed to execute a process for restoring the interrupt disabled state or a process for restoring the register bank designation.

[Input processing]
Next, the details of the input process (step X103) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 19, in the input process, first, the state of the detection signal of the switch captured in the input port 1, that is, the first input port 122 is read (step X121). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit ports, the state of that bit is cleared (step X122), and the state of the read input port 1 is saved (stored) in the switch control area 1 in the RWM (step). X123).

Next, the address of the input port 2, that is, the second input port 123 is prepared (step X124), and the address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM is prepared (step X125).
Then, after preparing the unused bit data (step X126), the bit data to be inverted is prepared (step X127), and the switch reading process (step X128) is performed.

After that, the address of the input port 3, that is, the third input port 124 is prepared (step X129), and the address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM is prepared (step X130).
Then, after preparing the unused bit data (step X131), the bit data to be inverted is prepared (step X132), the switch reading process (step X133) is performed, and the input process is completed.

In the present embodiment, "preparation" means setting a value in a register, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a value may be set in RWM or another memory. Further, as the information about the unused bit data and the bit data to be inverted, the information prepared corresponding to each input port is used.

[Switch reading process]
Next, the details of the switch reading process (steps X128, X133) in the above-mentioned input process will be described. As shown in FIG. 20, in the switch reading process, first, the state of the signal captured in the target input port is read (step X141). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit ports, the state of that bit is cleared (step X142), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step X143), and then the port input state 1 of the target switch control area is reached. Save (store) in (step X144). After that, it waits for the delay time (0.1 ms) until the second reading to elapse (step X145).

When the delay time (0.1 ms) elapses, the state of the signal captured in the target input port is read a second time (step X146). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit ports, the state of that bit is cleared (step X147), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step X148), and then the port input state 2 of the target switch control area is used. Save (store) in (step X149). After that, a definite bit pattern is created in which the bits with the same state are 1 and the bits with different states are 0 in the first and second readings (step X150), and the logical product of the definite bit pattern and the port input state 2 is taken, and this time. It is a fixed bit (step X151).

Next, an undetermined bit pattern is created in which bits having the same state as 0 and bits having different states as 1 in the first and second reads (step X152), and the logic between the undetermined bit pattern and the confirmed state at the time of the previous interrupt. The product is taken and used as the last holding bit (step X153). As a result, it is possible to obtain a signal state in which noise due to chattering of the switch or the like is removed. Then, the fixed bit this time and the held bit last time are combined and saved as the fixed state this time (step X154), the exclusive OR of the fixed state of the previous time and the fixed state this time is taken, and saved as the rising edge (step X155). The switch reading process ends.

When the timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch is read by reading the switch once for each interrupt process and comparing it with the result of the previous read to change the signal. There is a method of determining whether or not the switch has been executed, but if this is done, the correct determination may not be made if the state of the switch read by the previous interrupt is lost before the next interrupt processing. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, it is possible to avoid the above-mentioned problems by performing the switch reading process twice in one interrupt process with a predetermined time difference.

[Output processing]
Next, the details of the output process (step X104) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 21, in the output process, first, off-data is output (reset) to the port 135 (see FIG. 12) that outputs the segment data of the batch display device (LED) 50 (step X161). Next, the data to be output to the solenoid output port 134 that outputs the data of the upper prize-winning port solenoid 38b and the lower prize-winning port solenoid 39b is combined and output (step X162).

Then, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit line of the batch display device (LED) 50 is updated (step X163), and the output data of the LED digit line corresponding to the value of the digit counter is acquired (step). X164), the acquired information and the external information data are combined (step X165). Then, the combined data is output to the digit output port 136 and the external information output port 137 (step X166). After that, the output data of the segment line is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (step X167), and the loaded data is output to the port 135 for segment output (step X168).

Subsequently, the data to be output to the external information terminal board 71 is loaded and synthesized (step X169), the combined data and the launch permission output data are combined (step X170), and the combined data is used for external information output. Output to port 137 (step X171). Next, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70. (Step X172). After that, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (Step X173).

Next, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70. (Step X174). Further, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal of the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 ( Step X175). Then, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (Step X176) to end the output process.

[Payout command transmission process]
Next, the details of the payout command transmission process (step X105) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 22, in the payout command transmission process, first, it is checked whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step X181).

The winning number counter area is provided in the RAM 111C of the game control device 100, and the winning number counter area 1 and the winning number counter area 2 are provided. The prize number counter area 1 is an area used for transmitting a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out the prize balls, and is a prize for which the payout command has not yet been transmitted. The winning data corresponding to the ball is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 1 forms a prize ball command counter that can store information related to the prize ball command.

The prize number counter area 2 is used to transmit a main prize ball signal to be output to an external device every time the number of prize balls (planned payout number) generated by winning a prize in the prize opening reaches a predetermined number (10 in this case). The winning data corresponding to the prize balls that are used and have not been processed to generate the main prize ball signal is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 2 forms a main prize ball signal counter that can store information about the main prize ball signal. In addition to this main prize ball signal, the payout prize ball signal is output to the external device every time the number of prize balls actually paid out from the payout control device 200 reaches a predetermined number (10 in this case). By collating these two signals, it is possible to monitor fraudulent payouts.

Each of these prize number counter areas is provided with a prize number counter area for each prize ball number set for each prize opening (for example, 3 prize balls, 10 prize balls, 14 prize balls). Therefore, the count number of the corresponding winning number counter area is added by 1 based on the winning of the winning opening. That is, it is possible to store the information of the winning in units of one winning in the winning area. The winning number counter area 1 is allocated to a wider area than the winning number counter area 2, so that more winning data can be stored. This is because the main prize ball signal can be transmitted regardless of the state of the destination, whereas the payout command may suspend the transmission depending on the state of the payout control device 200 which is the destination, and more untransmitted signals are sent. This is because data may be accumulated.

In the process of checking whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step X181), among a plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls, the winning number counter area to be checked is "0". Determine if there is a count that is not. Then, when there is no count number (step X181: N), the address of the winning number counter area to be checked is updated (step X182), and it is determined whether the check of the count number of all the winning number counter areas is completed. (Step X183). If it is determined in this determination that all the checks have been completed (step X183; Y), the process proceeds to step X192. On the other hand, if it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step X183; N), the process returns to step X181 and the above process is repeated.

If it is determined in step X181 that there is a count number (step X181; Y), the count number in the target winning number counter area is subtracted (-1) (step X184), and the target winning number counter. Acquire the number of payouts corresponding to the area (step X185). Then, the value of the prize ball remaining number area and the acquired number of payouts are added to obtain a new prize ball remaining number (step X186), and the game is saved in the prize ball remaining number area (step X187). As the value of the prize ball remaining number region before this processing, a fraction that is less than a predetermined number that is a reference for the output of the main prize ball signal is stored.

After that, 10 which is a predetermined number as a reference for the output of the main prize ball signal is subtracted from the addition result (step X188), and it is determined whether the subtraction result is 0 or more (step X189). If the subtraction result is not 0 or more (step X189; N), the process proceeds to step X192. In this case, since the subtracted result is not saved in the prize ball remaining number area, the value before subtraction is stored in the prize ball remaining number area. When the subtraction result is 0 or more (step X189; Y), the value in the main prize ball signal output count area is updated by +1 (step X190), and the subtraction result is saved in the prize ball remaining number area (step X191). , Return to step X188.

As a result, the main prize ball signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer. That is, the game control device 100 serves as an external information output means for outputting a main prize ball signal including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out when the game ball is won in a predetermined winning area to the outside of the game machine. .. By outputting the main prize ball signal, when the payout of game balls such as during a big hit is concentrated, the output of the prize ball signal is delayed along with the payout of the game ball, and the accuracy generated during the big hit It is possible to prevent a problem that the number of prize balls cannot be counted.

In step X192, if the payout command transmission timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step X192), and it is determined whether the payout command transmission timer has become 0 (step X193). If the payout command transmission timer is not 0 (step X193; N), the payout command transmission process ends. When the payout command transmission timer is 0 (step X193; Y), it is determined whether the payout busy signal flag is busy (step X194).

The payout busy signal is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start the payout control, and if the payout control cannot be started immediately, the payout busy signal is turned on. That is, the payout busy signal can be said to be a signal indicating whether or not the payout command (prize ball command) can be accepted. That is, the payout busy signal forms a state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start payout control. The payout busy signal flag is information that sets whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start payout control based on the state of the payout busy signal, and is an idle state or payout that can immediately start payout control. Either a busy state in which control cannot be started immediately or an indefinite state in which the state is indefinite is set.

The indefinite state is set by clearing the busy signal flag area, for example, by processing when the power is turned on. This indefinite state is set to an idle state or a busy state based on the state of the payout busy signal being maintained for a predetermined period of time indicating that the payout control can or cannot be started immediately. It will be solved with. That is, when a power failure occurs and recovers from the power failure, even if a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200, a prize ball command is immediately issued to the payout control device 200. The prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 200 in response to the continuous output of the status signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control device 200 without transmission. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the prize ball command and surely grasps that the payout process can be performed immediately before transmitting the prize ball command, and the payout control corresponding to the prize ball command is performed. It is possible to prevent it from being damaged.

When the payout busy signal flag is busy (step X194; Y), the payout command transmission process ends. Here, even if the state is indefinite, it is determined that the user is busy. In this way, when the payout control device 200 cannot immediately start the payout control and does not send the payout command, it is possible to perform unnecessary processing by not performing the subsequent processing related to the transmission of the payout command. It is designed to prevent and reduce the burden of control.

When the payout busy signal flag is not busy (step X194; N), it is checked whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step X195). In the process of checking whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step X195), among a plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls, the winning number counter area to be checked is "0". Determine if there is a count that is not.

Then, when there is no count number in the winning number counter area to be checked (step X195; N), the address of the winning number counter area to be checked is updated (step X196), and all the winning number counter areas are displayed. It is determined whether the check of the count number is completed (step X197). If it is determined in this determination that all the checks have been completed (step X197; Y), the payout command transmission process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step X197; N), the process returns to step X195 and the above process is repeated.

Further, in step X195, when it is determined that there is a count number in the winning number counter area to be checked (step X195; Y), the count number in the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step). X198), the payout command corresponding to the address of the target winning number counter area 1 is acquired (step X199). Then, the acquired command is written to the payout serial transmission buffer (step X200), the initial value is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step X201), and the payout command transmission process is completed. The payout command transmission timer is for managing the transmission interval, and for example, 200 ms is set as an initial value.

As a result, a payout command (prize ball command) in units of one prize in the prize area is generated and transmitted to the payout control device 200. The payout control device 200 controls to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls based on this payout command. That is, the game control device 100 indicates that the state signal output from the payout control means (payout control device 200) indicating whether or not the payout control means can start the payout control can start the payout control. If so, it serves as a prize ball command transmitting means for transmitting the prize ball command to the payout control means.

Since the game control device 100 controls to transmit the prize ball command based on the state signal output from the payout control device 200 in this way, the prize is awarded only when the payout control device 200 can immediately execute the payout control. The ball command will be transmitted. As a result, the data corresponding to the winnings that have not been paid out will be held on the game control device 100 side, so that it will be backed up by the game control device 100 in the event of a power failure, and will be backed up by the payout control device 200. Accurate payout control can be realized without having a function to do so.

In a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine of JP-A-2000-321759), when a power cutoff state occurs for some reason, the payout control device 200 backs up data to its own storage means and immediately before the power cutoff. The payout control state based on the data of is maintained. However, the conventional gaming machine requires a function for backing up, which has a problem of increasing the cost. According to the present invention, accurate payout control can be realized even if the payout control device 200 does not have a function for backing up.

In addition, since the main prize ball signal transmitted to the external device is output regardless of the state of the payout busy signal, the main prize ball signal can be output without delay, and the prize ball is paid out by an external device such as a hall computer. The timing can be accurately grasped, for example, the base value can be accurately grasped. Further, since the prize ball command counter that can store the information about the prize ball command and the main prize ball signal counter that can store the information about the main prize ball signal are separately provided, the prize ball command and the main prize ball having different transmission timings are provided. The signal information can be managed separately, and the information can be managed reliably.

Based on the above, the game is controlled comprehensively, and the winning areas provided in the game area 32 (first starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37, second starting winning opening 97, general winning opening 35, first A game control means (game control device 100) that transmits a prize ball command based on the winning of a game ball to the 1 special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39), and a prize ball transmitted from the game control means. A payout control means (payout control device 200) that controls payout of game balls based on a command is provided, and the game control means can start payout control by the payout control means output from the payout control means. Control is performed to send a prize ball command to the payout control means based on a status signal (busy signal) indicating whether or not, and when a power failure occurs and the player recovers from the power failure, the payout control means can start the payout control. Even if a status signal indicating that there is a certain value is output, the prize ball command is not immediately transmitted to the payout control means, and the status signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control means continues for a predetermined period. The prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means in response to the output.

In addition, winning areas with different numbers of winning balls in the game area 32 (first starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37, second starting winning opening 97, general winning opening 35, first special variable winning device 38, second special A plurality of variable prize devices 39) are provided, and the game control means (game control device 100) is a prize ball command counter capable of specifying whether or not a prize ball command for instructing payout control of game balls has not been transmitted for each number of prize balls. (Game control device 100) is provided, and when a status signal indicates that payout control can be started and each prize ball command counter has an untransmitted prize ball command, the prize ball command is issued as a payout control means ( It is transmitted to the payout control device 200), and the status signal specifies whether or not the payout control means can start the payout control, and whether or not each prize ball command counter has an untransmitted prize ball command. It means that it is done before the identification of.

In addition to comprehensively controlling the game, the predetermined winning areas (first starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37, second starting winning opening 97, general winning opening 35, first special variable winning device 38, first 2 The game control means (game control device 100) that transmits a prize ball command based on the winning of the game ball to the special variable winning device 39), and the game ball based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means. A payout control means (payout control device 200) for performing payout control is provided, and the game control means pays out a status signal output from the payout control means indicating whether or not the payout control means can start payout control. The prize ball command transmitting means (game control device 100) that transmits the prize ball command to the payout control means when it indicates that the control can be started, and the payout that accompanies the winning of the game ball to the predetermined winning area. An external information output means (game control device 100) that outputs a prize ball signal (main prize ball signal) including information on a determined number of prize balls to the outside of the game machine is provided, and the external information output means is a payout control. The state signal output from the means outputs the prize ball signal regardless of whether or not the payout control means can start the payout control.

Further, even if the prize ball command transmitting means (game control device 100) indicates that the status signal can start the payout control when a power failure occurs and recovers from the power failure, the prize ball command is immediately issued. Is not transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and the prize ball command is issued in response to the state in which the state signal indicates that the payout control can be started continues for a predetermined period. It means that it is transmitted to the payout control means.

Further, the game control means (game control device 100) has a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) that can store information about the prize ball command and a prize that can store information about the prize ball signal (main prize ball signal). A ball signal counter (game control device 100) is provided, and the prize ball command transmitting means (game control device 100) is provided with a predetermined winning area (first starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37, second starting winning opening). 97 A prize ball command is generated in units of one prize in the general winning opening 35, the first special variable winning device 38, and the second special variable winning device 39), and the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started. The prize ball command counter (game control device 100) is configured to transmit one prize ball command to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and the prize ball command counter (game control device 100) is a unit of one prize in a predetermined winning area. The prize information can be stored as a prize, and the information is updated when the game ball is won in the predetermined prize area, and is updated in correspondence with the transmission to the prize ball command to the payout control means. The number of prize ball commands that have not been issued can be stored, and the external information output means accumulates the number of prize balls determined to be paid out in connection with the winning of the game ball in the predetermined winning area, and each time the accumulated value reaches the predetermined number. The prize ball signal is configured to be output to the outside of the game machine, and the prize ball signal counter can store the prize information in units of one prize in a predetermined prize area, and goes to the predetermined prize area. By updating when the game ball is won and updating in correspondence with the cumulative processing of the number of prize balls by the external information output means, it is possible to memorize the number of prize balls that have not been cumulatively processed yet. ..

[Random number update process 1]
FIG. 23 shows the random number update process 1 (step X106) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18). The random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number, which are the targets of the initial value random number update process. In this random number update process 1, first, it is determined whether the jackpot symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step X221).

When the big hit symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step X221; N), it is determined whether the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step X224). When the jackpot symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step X221; Y), the jackpot symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step X222), and the next initial value of the loaded jackpot symbol random number is supported. It is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the random number counter (random number area) to be used (step X223). After that, it is determined whether the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step X224).

When the small hit symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step X224; N), the random number update process 1 is terminated. When the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step X224; Y), the small hit symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step X225), and the next initial initial value of the loaded small hit symbol random number is loaded. The value is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step X226), and the random number update process 1 is terminated.

[Random number update process 2]
FIG. 24 shows the random number update process 2 (step X107) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18). The random number update process 2 is a process of updating the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figures 1 and 2. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, there are 1-byte random numbers (variable pattern random numbers 2 and 3) and 2-byte random numbers (variable pattern random numbers 1) as variable pattern random numbers, and both of them are to be updated in the random number update process 2. Then, each time an interrupt occurs, the update target is switched and processed. Moreover, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, the update process is performed at different interrupts for the upper byte and the lower byte. That is, the update of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 (random number for determining the reach variation mode) by the random number update process 2 executed in one interrupt process for the main process is executed for either the upper 1 byte or the lower 1 byte. It is configured to.

In the random number update process 2, first, the random number update scan counter for sequentially designating which of the plurality of random numbers to be updated is to be the target of the current update process is updated (step X231). Next, the address of the effect random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (step X232). Then, the upper limit determination value of the random number is acquired from the referenced table based on the calculated address (step X233). The table referred to at this time stores an upper limit determination value for each type of random number, that is, a value for determining whether or not the random number has made a round.

Subsequently, for example, the value of the M1 counter provided in the gaming microcomputer in this embodiment is loaded (step X234). Randomness can be added to random numbers by using the value of the M1 counter. Next, a mask value for masking the value of the M1 counter is acquired and the value of the M1 counter is masked (step X235). The mask value has a different number of bits depending on the random number to be updated, for example, when updating the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter and the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 are used. Is set to the lower 4 bits of the M1 counter when updating. This is because the upper limit differs depending on the type of random number. As a mask value, when updating the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter are updated, and when updating the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the lower 1 byte of the M1 counter is updated. Although 4-bit is illustrated, the numerical value is an example and is not limited to this.

Next, it is determined whether the random number region (random number counter) to be updated is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step X236). When the random number region is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step X236; Y), the value remaining by masking the value of the M1 counter with the mask value of the upper 1 byte as the addition value (hereinafter, this is used). The mask update value is set by adding "1" to the masked value), the lower 1 byte is set to "0" (step X237), and the process proceeds to step X239. If the random number area is not the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step X236; N), the upper 1 byte is set to "0" and the lower 1 byte is set to the mask update value as the addition value (step). X238), the process proceeds to step X239. The reason for adding "1" to the masked value is to avoid that the masked value may become "0", and if "0" is added later, it does not change from the value before addition. is there.

Then, it is determined whether the random number to be updated is a 2-byte random number (step X239), and if it is a 2-byte random number (step X239; Y), the value of the random number region to be updated (2 bytes) is set (step X240). , Step X242. If the random number to be updated is not a 2-byte random number (step X239; N), "0" is set as the upper 1 byte of the random number value, and the value of the random number area to be updated (1 byte) is set as the lower 1 byte of the random number value. ) Is set (step X241), and the process proceeds to step X242.

In step X242, a value obtained by adding the added value determined in step X237 or X238 to the random number value is used as a new random number value, and it is determined whether or not the new random number value is larger than the upper limit determination value acquired in step X233 (step). X243). Then, when the new random number value is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step X243; N), the new random number value is saved in the random number area lower than the 1-byte random number or the 2-byte random number (step X245). If the new random number value is larger than the upper limit determination value (step X243; Y), the value obtained by subtracting the upper limit determination value from the new random number value is used as the new random number value again (step X244), and this value is set to 1. Save in the random number area lower than the byte random number or the 2-byte random number (step X245).

Next, it is determined whether the updated random number is a 2-byte random number (step X246), and if it is not a 2-byte random number (step X246; N), the random number update process 2 is terminated. In the case of a 2-byte random number (step X246; Y), a new random number value (if a new random number value is calculated again, that value) is saved in a random number area higher than the 2-byte random number (step X247). ), The random number update process 2 is terminated.

In this way, the CPU 111A updates the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figures 1 and 2. Therefore, the CPU 111A has a variation mode of the special figure variation display game among various random numbers extracted based on the inflow of game balls into the first start winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, and the second starting winning opening 97. It serves as a random number updating means for updating the fluctuation pattern random number for determining the fluctuation pattern).

[Winning opening switch / status monitoring process]
FIG. 25 shows the winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step X107) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18). In this winning opening switch / status monitoring process, first, a winning opening monitoring table 1 corresponding to one of the upper winning opening switches 38a in the upper winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) is prepared (step X301). , Even though the big winning opening is not open, the fraud & winning monitoring process (step X302) for monitoring whether there is an illegal winning in the big winning opening and detecting a normal winning is executed.

In the winning opening monitoring table (fraud monitoring table), a monitoring switch bit indicating the position of data for determining whether or not there is an input in the target switch, a lower address of fraud monitoring information, a lower address of the fraudulent winning number area, and a fraudulent winning error Information on the notification command, the upper limit of the number of illegal winnings (the number of illegal winning judgments), the address of the winning opening switch table, and the notification timer update information (permission / update) are defined. Further, in the winning opening switch table, information on the number of times of monitoring (the number of switches), the monitoring switch bit, the address of the winning number counter area 1 and the address of the winning number counter area 2 is defined. These fraud monitoring tables and winning tables are prepared according to each switch to be monitored.

After that, the winning opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other lower winning opening switch 39a in the lower grand winning opening (second special variable winning device 39) is prepared (step X303), and it is monitored for illegal winning. The fraud & prize monitoring process (step X304) for detecting a normal prize is executed. Next, prepare a winning opening monitoring table for the winning opening switch (starting opening 2 switch 37a) in Fuden (step X305), monitor for illegal winning, and detect normal winning. (Step X306) is executed.

Then, a winning opening monitoring table (here, starting opening 1 switch 36a, starting opening 3 switch 97a, winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35) that can always win a prize is prepared (step X307), and the number of winnings is determined. The winning number counter update process (step X308) to be updated is performed. Next, the state scan counter for sequentially designating which of the plurality of switches for monitoring the state and which switch or signal is to be monitored this time is updated (step X309). This status scan counter is updated in the range 0-3. After that, the gaming machine state monitoring table 1 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the state scan counter (step X310). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step X311) for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is performed.

By referring to the value of the status scan counter in the game machine status monitoring table 1, if the value of the status scan counter is 0, the status can be monitored based on the abnormality detection signal 1 output due to the occurrence of the switch connector disconnection or the like. When the value of the status scan counter is set to 1, monitoring of the status based on the shoot-out switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. When the value of the status scan counter is 2, the status monitoring based on the overflow switch signal is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is 3, the status monitoring based on the payout abnormality status signal is set.

Next, the gaming machine status monitoring table 2 for setting the monitoring status according to the value of the status scan counter is prepared (step X312). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step X313) for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is performed.

By referring to the value of the status scan counter in the game machine status monitoring table 2, if the value of the status scan counter is 0, the status monitoring based on the signal output from the glass frame open detection switch is set, and the status scan is performed. When the value of the counter is 1, the status monitoring based on the signal output from the front frame opening detection switch is set. Further, when the value of the state scan counter is 2, the monitoring of the state based on the frame radio wave illegal signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is 3, the monitoring of the state based on the touch switch signal is set.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the status scan counter is 0 (step X314), and if the value of the error scan counter is not 0 (step X314; N), the winning opening switch / status monitoring process is terminated. In this case, there is no status monitoring target in the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 to be referred to next. When the value of the error scan counter is 0 (step X314; Y), the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 is prepared (step X315), and the gaming machine status check for determining the status such as whether an error has occurred is determined. The process (step X316) is performed.

By referring to the value of the status scan counter in the gaming machine status monitoring table 3, if the value of the status scan counter is 0, the status can be monitored based on the abnormality detection signal 2 output due to the occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector or the like. Set. It should be noted that the game machine status monitoring table 3 is not defined when the status scan counters are 1 to 3.

After that, the payout busy signal check process (step X317) for setting the busy signal flag based on the payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can start the payout control is performed, and the winning opening switch / status monitoring process is completed. To do. Since the processes of steps X315 to X317 are executed only when the value of the state scan counter updated for each timer interrupt is 0, the processes are executed once every four timer interrupts. That is, when the timer interrupt is performed every 4 ms, the processes of steps X315 to X317 are performed every 16 ms.

[Illegal & winning monitoring process]
FIG. 26 shows fraud & winning monitoring processing (steps X302, X304, X306) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / status monitoring processing. This fraud & winning monitoring process is performed by each of the two upper large winning opening switches 38a of the first special variable winning device 38, the lower large winning opening switch 39a of the second special variable winning device 39, and the starting port of the normal variable winning device 37. This is a process performed on the two switches 37a. With regard to these, fraud is likely to occur in which the opening / closing member is forcibly opened, a game ball is inserted, and the prize ball is paid out. Therefore, fraud is monitored in addition to detecting the winning.

In this fraud & prize monitoring process, first, the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning port switch to be error-monitored is checked (step X321), and it is determined whether or not the fraud monitoring period is in progress (step X322). The fraud monitoring period is a period other than during the special gaming state in which the first special variable winning device 38 is opened when the winning opening switch to be error-monitored is the upper large winning opening switch 38a, and the winning opening to be error-monitored. When the switch is the lower grand prize opening switch 39a, it is a period other than the special gaming state in which the second special variable winning device 39 is opened. Further, when the winning port switch to be error-monitored is the starting port 2 switch 37a, it is a period other than the state in which the opening control of the normal variable winning device 37 is executed based on the hit in the normal drawing.

Then, in the case of the fraud monitoring period (step X322; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input in the target winning opening switch (step X323). When there is no input to the target winning opening switch (step X323; N), the target notification timer update information is loaded (step X332). Further, when there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step X323; Y), the number of illegal winnings of the target is updated by +1 (step X324), and the number of illegal winnings after addition is the number of fraud occurrence determinations to be monitored (for example). It is determined whether or not the number exceeds (5) (step X325).

The reason why the number of judgments is set to 5 is that, for example, when the winning opening in the open state is converted to the closed state, the game ball is sandwiched between the opening / closing members of the winning opening, and the game ball has passed the valid period of the winning opening switch. This is to prevent it from being judged as illegal when a prize is won or when there is noise in the signal, and it is not easily judged as an error even though it is not illegal.

Then, when the number of determined items is not exceeded (step X325; N), the winning opening monitoring table of the target winning opening switch is prepared (step X330). When the number of determined items is exceeded (step X325; Y), the number of illegal winnings is limited to the number of illegal winnings (step X326), and the initial value (for example, 60,000 ms) is saved in the target illegal winning notification timer area (step). X327). Next, the target fraud occurrence command is prepared (step X328), the fraudulent winning occurrence flag is prepared as the fraud flag (step X329), and the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step X340). ).

On the other hand, when it is not the fraud monitoring period (step X322; N), the winning opening monitoring table of the target winning opening switch is prepared (step X330), and the winning number counter update process (step X331) for setting the winning ball is performed. .. Then, the target notification timer update information is loaded (step X332), and whether or not the notification timer update permission is permitted is determined (step X333). Then, when the update of the notification timer is not permitted (step X333; N), the fraudulent & winning monitoring process is terminated. When the update of the notification timer is permitted (step X333; Y), if the target notification timer is not 0, the notification timer is updated by -1 (step X334). The minimum value of the notification timer is set to 0.

The update of the notification timer is permitted when the winning opening switch to be error-monitored is one of the upper winning opening switches 38a, and is permitted when the winning opening switch to be error-monitored is the other upper winning opening switch 38a. Not done. As a result, regarding the fraudulent notification of the first special variable winning device 38, the notification timer is updated twice as frequently, and it is prevented that the time is up in half of the specified time (for example, 60,000 ms). .. When the winning opening switch to be error-monitored is the lower winning opening switch 39a or the starting opening 2 switch 37a, the update of the notification timer is always permitted.

After that, it is determined whether the value of the notification timer is 0 (step X335), and if the value is not 0 (step X335; N), that is, if the time is not up, the fraud & winning monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the value is 0 (step X335; Y), that is, when the time is up or the time has already been up, the target fraud release command is prepared (step X336), and the fraudulent prize cancellation flag is set as the fraud flag. Prepare (step X337). Then, it is determined whether it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step X338).

When the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step X338; Y), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the current fraud & winning monitoring process, the target number of illegal winnings is cleared ( Step X339), the prepared fraudulent flag is compared with the value of the target fraudulent flag area (step X340). In addition, when the value of the notification timer is not 0 (step X338; N), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the fraud & winning monitoring process before the previous time, the prepared fraud flag is targeted. Compare with the value of the invalid flag area (step X340).

Then, when the prepared fraud flag and the value of the target fraud flag area match (step X340; Y), the fraud & winning monitoring process ends. If the prepared invalid flag and the value of the target invalid flag area do not match (step X340; N), the prepared invalid flag is saved in the target invalid flag area (step X341), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step X342), the fraud & winning monitoring process is terminated. By the above processing, an error notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when an error occurs, and an illegal winning error release command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when the error is released, and the start and end of the error notification are set. Will be done.

[Winning counter update process]
FIG. 27 shows the winning number counter update processing (steps X308, X331) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / status monitoring processing and fraud & winning monitoring processing. In this winning number counter update process, first, the number of winning opening switches to be monitored is acquired from the winning opening switch table of the winning opening monitoring table (step X351), and is input to the target winning opening switch (correctly, the input is changed). ) Is present (step X352).

When there is no input (step X352: N), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step X361), and it is determined whether the monitoring of all switches is completed (step X362). If there is an input (step X352; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 1 is loaded (step X353), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X354), and it is determined whether or not the overflow occurs (step X354). Step X355). Then, when overflow has not occurred (step X355; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 1 (step X356), and the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step X357). ). When an overflow occurs (step X355; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step X357).

After loading the value of the target winning number counter area 2 (step X357), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X358), and it is determined whether or not it overflows (step X359). If no overflow has occurred (step X359; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 2 (step X360), and the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step X361). ), It is determined whether the monitoring of all the switches is completed (step X362). When an overflow occurs (step X359; Y), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step X361), and it is determined whether the monitoring of all switches has been completed (step X362).

When the monitoring of all the switches is not completed (step X362; N), the process returns to the process of determining whether or not the target winning opening switch has an input (step X352). When the monitoring of all the switches is completed (step X362; Y), the winning number counter update process is completed. By the above processing, the winning number counter areas 1 and 2 are updated based on the winning in the winning area, and the winning information is stored.

[Direction command setting process]
FIG. 28 shows the effect command setting process (step X342) in the above-mentioned fraud & prize monitoring process. Note that this effect command setting process is a process common to the effect command setting process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process. In this effect command setting process, first, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step X371), and it is determined whether the transmission buffer is full (step X372).

If the transmission buffer is full (step X372; Y), the process returns to step X371. If the transmission buffer is not full (step X372; N), the command data (MODE (upper byte)) is written to the production serial transmission buffer (step X373), and the status of the serial transmission buffer is read (step X374). , Determine if the transmit buffer is full (step X375).

If the transmit buffer is full (step X375; Y), the process returns to step X374. If the transmission buffer is not full (step X375; N), the command data (ACTION (lower byte)) is written to the effect serial transmission buffer (step X376), and the effect command setting process ends.

As described above, by transmitting the command to the effect control device 300 by serial communication, the burden on the game control device 100 can be reduced and the analysis of the command can be made difficult. In addition, the command transmission timing can be accelerated and the number of data lines can be reduced. Further, the effect control device 300 does not need to capture commands in the strobe, and the burden can be reduced.

[Game machine status check processing]
FIG. 29 shows the gaming machine state check process (steps X311 and X313, X316) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / state monitoring process. In this gaming machine state check process, first, a state monitoring table corresponding to the state scan counter is acquired (step X451), and it is determined whether or not the signal to be monitored is on (step X452).

Information corresponding to the status scan counter is defined in the status monitoring table. This information includes, for example, a lower address of the start address of the state monitoring area, a lower address of the port input state area of the switch control area in which the target signal information is stored, mask data for extracting only the bit of the target signal, and a signal. On judgment data, status off command (in the case of an error system, an error notification end command is issued), status on command (in the case of an error system, an error notification start command is issued), status off monitoring timer comparison value, status on monitoring timer Includes comparison values.

When the target signal is not on (step X452: N), the state off flag is prepared as the state flag (step X453), and the target state off command is acquired and prepared (step X454). After that, the target state-off monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step X455), and the value of the target signal control area is compared with the current signal state (step X459). When the target signal is not on (step X452: N), it is a state indicating that the error type signal is not an error (normal), and is a state indicating that the signal from the touch switch is not touched. is there.

On the other hand, when the target signal is on (step X452: Y), the state on flag is prepared as the state flag (step X456), and the target state on command is acquired and prepared (step X457). After that, the target state-on monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step X458), and the value of the target signal control area is compared with the current signal state (step X459). When the target signal is on (step X452: Y), it means that the error-type signal is an error (abnormal or invalid), and the signal from the touch switch is touched. It is a state showing.

When the value of the target signal control area and the current signal state match (step X459; Y), that is, when the signal state has not changed, the target state monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step X462). , It is determined whether the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step X463). Further, when the value of the target signal control area and the current signal state do not match (step X459; N), that is, when the signal state changes, the current signal state is saved in the target signal control area (step X459; N). Step X460). Then, the target status monitoring timer is cleared (step X461), the target status monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step X462), and it is determined whether the value of the target status monitoring timer is equal to or higher than the monitoring timer comparison value (step X461). Step X463).

If the value of the target status monitoring timer is not equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step X463; N), the gaming machine status check process ends. When the value of the target status monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step X463: Y), the status monitoring timer is updated by -1 to keep the comparison value at the value of -1 (step X464). The state flag is compared with the value of the target state flag area (step X465).

Then, when the prepared state flag and the value of the target state flag area match (step X465; Y), the gaming machine state check process ends. If the prepared state flag and the value of the target state flag area do not match (step X465; N), the prepared state flag is saved in the target state flag area (step X466), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step X467), the game machine state check process is completed. As a result, the state off command prepared in step X454 or the state on command prepared in X457 is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

[Payout busy signal check processing]
FIG. 30 shows the payout busy signal check process (step X317) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / state monitoring process. In this payout busy signal check process, first, it is determined whether or not the payout busy signal input from the payout control device 200 is on (step X471). The payout busy signal is turned on when the payout control device 200 cannot start the payout control.

When the payout busy signal is not on (step X471; N), an idle state flag is prepared as a state flag (step X472), and an off confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 ms) is set (step X473). When the payout busy signal is on (step X471; Y), a busy state flag is prepared as a state flag (step X474), and an on confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 ms) is set (step X475). ..

After that, it is determined whether the value in the busy signal state region is the same as the state of the current signal, that is, whether there is a change of on or off (step X476), and if they are the same (step X476; Y), The busy signal monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step X479). If they are not the same (step X476; N), the current signal state is saved in the busy signal state region (step X477), the busy signal monitoring timer is cleared to 0 (step X478), and the busy signal monitoring timer is set. Update by +1 (step X479).

Next, it is determined whether the value of the busy signal monitoring timer is larger than the previously set on-determination monitoring timer comparison value or off-confirmation monitoring timer comparison value, that is, whether the signal confirmation time (for example, 32 ms) has been reached (step). X480). If the signal confirmation time has not been reached (step X480; N), the payout busy signal check process ends. When the signal confirmation time is reached (step X480; Y), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by -1, and the previously set on-confirmation monitoring timer comparison value or off-confirmation monitoring timer comparison value of -1 is obtained. (Step X481), the prepared state flag is saved in the payout busy signal flag area (step X482), and the payout busy signal check process ends.

By this process, the busy signal flag is set based on the payout busy signal. At this time, even if the state of the payout busy signal changes, the busy signal flag is not changed immediately, but the busy signal flag is changed when the changed state continues for the signal confirmation time. It is difficult to be affected by such factors.

Further, since the busy signal flag is cleared when the power is turned on, the busy signal flag is not set and the state becomes indefinite until one of the signal states continues for the signal confirmation time. As a result, when a power failure occurs and the device recovers from the power failure, the prize ball command is immediately issued to the payout control device 200 even if a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200. A prize ball command is issued to the payout control device 200 in response to a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control device 200, which is not transmitted to the payout control device 200. It will be sent. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the prize ball command and surely grasps that the payout process can be performed immediately before transmitting the prize ball command, and the payout control corresponding to the prize ball command is performed. It is possible to prevent it from being damaged.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the start port switch monitoring process (step X109) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 31, in the start port switch monitoring process, first, the start port 1 (first start winning opening 36) winning monitoring table is prepared (step X485), and the hard random number acquisition process is performed (step X486). Then, it is determined whether or not there is information with a start opening prize that is set when a big hit random number is acquired based on the winning of the first start winning opening 36 in the hard random number acquisition process (step X487).

If the starting opening winning information is not set based on the winning of the first starting winning opening 36 (step X487; N), the process proceeds to step X494. In this case, the information that there is no starting opening prize is set. On the other hand, when the information with the starting opening winning is set based on the winning of the first starting winning opening 36 (step X487; Y), it is determined whether or not the probability is high (step X488). Then, when the probability is high (step X488; Y), the process proceeds to step X490. Further, when the probability is not high (step X488; N), it is determined whether or not the jackpot is in progress (during the special gaming state based on the jackpot) (step X489).

Then, when the jackpot is not hit (step X489; N), the process proceeds to step X490. If the jackpot is in progress (step X489; Y), the process proceeds to step X492. In step X490, a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step X490), and an effect command setting process is performed (step X491). After that, a table for setting the information of the hold by the start port 1 is prepared (step X492), and the special figure start port switch common process is performed (step X493).

Next, the starting port 2 (ordinary variable winning device 37) winning monitoring table was prepared (step X494), hard random number acquisition processing was performed (step X495), and a jackpot random number was acquired based on the winning of the ordinary variable winning device 37. It is determined whether or not there is information on starting opening winning that is set in the case (step X496).

If the start opening winning information is not set based on the winning of the normal variable winning device 37 (step X496; N), the process proceeds to step X501. In this case, information on no starting opening prize is set. On the other hand, when the start opening winning information is set based on the winning of the ordinary variable winning device 37 (step X496; Y), the ordinary electric accessory (ordinary variable winning device 37) is operating, that is, When it is determined whether or not the normal variable winning device 37 is activated to open the game ball in an open state (step X497), and when the normal electric accessory is operating (step X497; Y), The process proceeds to step X499. On the other hand, when the normal electric accessory is not in operation (step X497; N), it is determined whether or not the electric power fraud is occurring (step X498).

In step X498, when the number of fraudulent winnings to the ordinary variable winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations (for example, 5), it is determined that fraudulent occurrence is occurring. In the normal variable winning device 37, the game ball cannot be won in the closed state, and the game ball can be won only in the open state. Therefore, if a game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some abnormality or fraud has occurred, and if there is a game ball that wins in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of fraudulent prizes. Then, when the number of fraudulent winnings counted in this way is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of fraud occurrence determinations (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

If it is determined in step X498 that fraudulent electric power is occurring (step X498; Y), the process proceeds to step X501. In addition, when it is determined that the fraudulent electric power is not occurring (step X498; N), a table for setting the holding information by the second starting port (normal variable winning device 37) is prepared (step X499), and the special figure is started. After performing the common processing of the mouth switch (step X500), the process proceeds to step X501.

Next, the starting port 3 (second starting winning opening 97) winning monitoring table is prepared (step X501), and the hard random number acquisition process is performed (step X502). Then, it is determined whether or not there is information with a start opening prize that is set when a big hit random number is acquired based on the winning of the second start winning opening 97 in the hard random number acquisition process (step X503).

If the start opening winning information is not set based on the winning of the second starting winning opening 97 (step X503; N), the starting opening switch monitoring process is terminated. In this case, the information that there is no starting opening prize is set. On the other hand, when the information with the starting opening winning is set based on the winning of the second starting winning opening 97 (step X503; Y), it is determined whether or not the probability is high (step X504). Then, when the probability is high (step X504; Y), the process proceeds to step X508. Further, when the probability is not high (step X504; N), it is determined whether or not the jackpot is in progress (in the special gaming state based on the jackpot) (step X505).

Then, if the jackpot is not hit (step X505; N), the process proceeds to step X506. If the jackpot is in progress (step X505; Y), the process proceeds to step X508. In step X506, a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step X506), and an effect command setting process is performed (step X507). After that, a table for setting the hold information by the start port 3 is prepared (step X508), the special figure start port switch common process is performed (step X509), and the start port switch monitoring process is completed.

Based on receiving the right-handed instruction notification command transmitted in steps X490 and X506, the effect control device 300 performs right-handed instruction notification instructing the player to make a right-handed hit by display, voice, or the like. .. In the high probability state, the time is shortened, so it is more advantageous for the player to hit the right side, which can win the normal variable winning device 37, and the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special even during the special gaming state. A right-handed player who can win a prize in the variable winning device 39 is more advantageous for the player. Therefore, when a winning is detected in the first starting winning opening 36 or the second starting winning opening 97, which is not allowed to win unless it is left-handed, the right-handed instruction is notified. In the special game state based on the small hit, the possibility of winning is low, so the right-handed notification may not be performed, but it may be performed. Further, in the case of a special game state based on the 2R probability variation jackpot, since the possibility of winning is low, the right-handed notification may not be performed. Further, when the ending in the special game state is in progress, the right-handed notification may not be performed.

[Hard random number acquisition process]
FIG. 32 shows the hard random number acquisition process (steps X486, X495, X502) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process. In this hard random number acquisition process, first, information on no winning opening is set (step X511), and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the target switch (step X512).

If there is no input to the target switch (step X512; N), the hard random number acquisition process ends. When the target switch has an input (step X512; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step X513), and it is determined whether or not the target random number latch register has latch data (step X514).

If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step X514; N), the hard random number acquisition process ends. If there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step X514; Y), the jackpot random number extracted in the target hard random number latch register is loaded and prepared (step X515). Then, the start opening winning information is set (step X516), and the hard random number acquisition process is completed.

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
Next, the details of the special figure start port switch common process (steps X493, X500, X509) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process will be described. The special figure start port switch common process is a process that is commonly performed for each input when the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, and the start port 3 switch 97a are input.

As shown in FIG. 33, in the special figure start port switch common process, first, among the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, and the start port 3 switch 97a, the number of winnings to the start port switch to be monitored is related. Whether the number of output times overflows by loading the start port signal output number of times, which is the number of times the information is output to the external management device of the game machine 10 (step X521), and updating the loaded value by +1 (step X522). Is determined (step X523).

When the number of outputs does not overflow (step X523; N), the updated value is saved in the start port signal output count area of the RWM (step X524), and the process proceeds to step X525. On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (step X523; Y), the process proceeds to step X525. In the present embodiment, a value from "0" to "255" can be stored in the start port signal output frequency region. Then, when the loaded value is "255", the updated value becomes "0" by +1 update, and it is determined that the number of outputs overflows, and the save is not performed.

Next, among the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, and the start port 3 switch 97a, it is determined whether the number of special figure reservations (start memory) to be updated corresponding to the start port switch to be monitored is less than the upper limit value. (Step X525). If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step X525; N), the special figure start port switch common process is terminated. If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is less than the upper limit (step X525; Y), the number of special figure reservations to be updated (number of special figure 1 hold or special figure 2 hold) is updated by +1 (step X525; Y). Step X526), prepare the start port switch to be monitored and the decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure hold number (step X527), perform the effect command setting process (step X528), and perform the target start port winning flag. Is saved (step X529).

Subsequently, the address of the start port switch to be monitored and the random number storage area corresponding to the number of reserved special figures is calculated (step X530), and the jackpot random number prepared by the hard random number acquisition process of steps X486, X495, and X502 is used as the RWM. Save in the jackpot random number storage area of (step X531). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the start port switch to be monitored is extracted, prepared (step X532), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X533).

Next, the variation pattern random numbers (variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 in the case of the present embodiment) are saved in the variation pattern random number storage area of the corresponding RWM (step X534). Then, the small hit symbol random number is extracted, prepared (step X535), and saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X536). After that, the special figure reservation information determination process (step X537), which is the look-ahead process, is performed to end the special figure start port switch common process.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of game balls into the start winning area of the first starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 97, and the normal variable winning device 37. It serves as a start storage means for storing up to a predetermined number as start memory that is the right to execute a variable display game. Further, the start storage means (game control device 100) first sets various random value values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening 36, which is the starting opening of FIG. 1, up to a predetermined number. The second start is stored as a start memory, and various random values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening 97 and the normal variable winning device 37, which are the starting openings of the special figure 2, up to a predetermined number. Remember as a memory.

[Special figure reservation information judgment processing]
FIG. 34 shows the special figure hold information determination process (step X537) in the above-mentioned special figure start port switch common process. The special figure reservation information determination process is a look-ahead process for determining result-related information corresponding to the special figure start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the special figure start memory. In this special figure reservation information determination process, first, a jackpot determination process for determining whether or not a jackpot is a jackpot is performed depending on whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value (step X543). Then, when the determination result is a big hit (step X544; Y), the big hit symbol random number check table is set (step X545), and the stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared big hit symbol random number is acquired (step X546). A look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information is prepared (step X551).

On the other hand, when the determination result is not a big hit (step X544; N), a small hit determination process for determining whether or not the jackpot is a small hit is performed depending on whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the small hit determination value (step X547). ). Then, when the determination result is a small hit (step X548; Y), the stop symbol information of the small hit is set (step X549), and the look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information is prepared (step X551). If the determination result is not a small hit (step X548; N), the out-of-order stop symbol information is set (step X550), and the look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information is prepared (step X551).

After preparing the look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information (step X551), the effect command setting process is performed (step X552). Next, the special figure information setting process (step X553) for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is performed, and the special figure variation pattern setting process for setting the variation mode of the special figure 1 variation display game is performed. (Step X554).

Then, a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number indicating the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared (step X555), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step X556), the special figure reservation information determination process is terminated. The special figure information setting process in step X553 and the special figure variation pattern setting process in step X554 are the special figure 1 fluctuation start process of the special figure 1 normal process and the special figure 2 change start process of the special figure 2 normal process. This is the same as the process executed at the start of the variable display game.

By the above processing, the look-ahead change pattern command including the result of the special figure change display game based on the special figure start memory and the look-ahead fluctuation pattern command including the information of the change pattern in the special figure change display game based on the special figure start memory. Is prepared and transmitted to the effect control device 300. As a result, the judgment result (look-ahead result) of the result-related information (whether it is a big hit or a small hit and the type of the fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the special figure start memory can be displayed in the special figure change display game based on the corresponding special figure start memory. It is possible to notify the effect control device 300 before the start timing, and in particular, by changing the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41, etc., before the start timing of the special figure variation display game. It is possible to notify the player of the result-related information.

That is, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as a start memory in the start winning prize storage means (game control device 100) before executing the variation display game based on the start memory (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained). (Judgment such as) Makes a preliminary judgment means. It should be noted that the time for determining the random number value stored in advance corresponding to the start memory is not only at the start winning prize when the start memory occurs, but also at any time before the variable display game based on the start memory is performed. Good.

[Special Figure 1 Game Processing]
FIG. 35 shows the special figure 1 game processing (step X110) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing. In the special figure 1 game process, control of the entire process related to the special figure 1 variable display game and setting of the display of the special figure 1 are performed. In this special figure 1 game processing, first, during the big hit / small hit of special figure 2, that is, during the special gaming state executed based on the result of the special figure 2 variable display game being a big hit or a small hit. (Step Y101).

When the big hit / small hit of the special figure 2 is not in progress (step Y101; N), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed (step Y102), and if the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0, the game is updated by -1 (step Y103). ). Further, when the big hit / small hit in FIG. 2 is in progress (step Y101; Y), the process proceeds to step Y103.

In the large winning opening switch monitoring process, the game ball in the upper large winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38 and the lower large winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variable winning device 39. Performs processing to monitor detection. In the special figure 1 game processing, the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed for the special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 1 variable display game being a big hit or a small hit, and the special figure 2 variable display is performed. Regarding the special game state executed based on the result of the game being a big hit or a small hit, the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed in the special figure 2 game process described later.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (step Y104). Special Figure 1 If the value of the game processing timer is not 0 (step Y104; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step Y119, and subsequent processing is performed. Further, when the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (step Y104; Y), that is, when the time is up or the time is already up, the process is branched to the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game processing number. The game sequence branch table referred to in FIG. 1 is set in the register (step Y105). Then, using the table, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game processing number is acquired (step Y106), and the subroutine call by the special figure 1 game processing number is performed (step Y107).

In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "0", the fluctuation start of the special figure 1 variable display game is monitored, and the variable start setting and effect setting of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the special figure 1 variable display game are set. FIG. 1 Special figure 1 for setting information necessary for performing processing during fluctuations Fig. 1 Ordinary processing (step Y108) is performed. In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "1", the special figure 1 sets the stop display time, sets the information necessary for performing the special figure 1 display processing, and the like. 1 Perform the variable processing (step Y109).

In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, the fanfare command is set according to the type of big hit, and each big hit type is set. The special figure 1 display processing (step Y110) for setting the fanfare time according to the opening pattern of the large winning opening, setting the information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing, and the like is performed.

In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "3", the opening time of the big winning opening is set, the number of opening times is updated, and the information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big winning opening is set. Perform fanfare / interval processing (step Y111). In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "4", the process of setting the interval command if the jackpot round is not the final round, while setting the ending command if it is the final round, or the big winning opening. The large winning opening opening processing (step Y112) for setting the information necessary for performing the remaining ball processing is performed.

In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "5", if the big hit round is the final round, the process of setting the time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged, or the special figure 1 The big winning opening remaining ball processing (step Y113) for setting the information necessary for performing the big hit end processing is performed. In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "6", the special figure 1 jackpot end process (step Y114) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure 1 normal process (step Y108). I do.

In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "7", the opening time / opening pattern of the large winning opening when a small hit occurs, the fanfare command is set, and the small hit medium processing is performed. The small hit fanfare middle process (step Y115) for setting the information necessary for the game is performed. In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "8", the small hit middle processing (step Y116) for setting the ending command, setting the information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball processing, and the like is performed. Do.

In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "9", the processing for setting the time for the remaining balls that have won in the large winning opening during the small hit medium processing and the small hit end. The small hit remaining ball processing (step Y117) for setting the information necessary for performing the processing is performed. In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "10", the special figure 1 small hit end process (step Y118) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure 1 normal processing is performed.

After that, the special figure 1 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51 is prepared (step Y119), and the symbol fluctuation control process (step Y120) related to the special figure 1 display 51 is performed to perform the special figure 1 display. FIG. 1 The game process is terminated. This special figure 1 game process performs a process of performing a series of execution control related to the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game).

[Special Figure 2 Game Processing]
FIG. 36 shows the special figure 2 game processing (step X111) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing. In the special figure 2 game process, control of the entire process related to the special figure 2 variable display game and setting of the display of the special figure 2 are performed. This special figure 2 game process basically performs the same process as the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process for the special figure 2.

In this special figure 2 game processing, first, during the big hit / small hit of special figure 1, that is, during the special gaming state executed based on the result of the special figure 1 variable display game being a big hit or a small hit. (Step Y131). Then, when the big hit / small hit of Special Figure 1 is not in progress (step Y131; N), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed (step Y132), and if the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0, the game is updated by -1 (step Y131; N). Step Y133). Further, when the big hit / small hit in FIG. 1 is in progress (step Y131; Y), the process proceeds to step Y133.

In the large winning opening switch monitoring process, the game ball in the upper large winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38 and the lower large winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variable winning device 39. Performs processing to monitor detection. In the special figure 2 game processing, the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed for the special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 2 variable display game being a big hit or a small hit, and the special figure 1 variable display is performed. Regarding the special game state executed based on the result of the game being a big hit or a small hit, the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y134). Special Figure 2 If the value of the game processing timer is not 0 (step Y134; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step Y152, and subsequent processing is performed. Further, when the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y134; Y), that is, when the time is up or the time is already up, the process is branched to the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game processing number. 2 The game sequence branch table referred to in FIG. 2 is set in the register (step Y136). Then, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game processing number is acquired using the table (step Y137), and the subroutine call by the special figure 2 game processing number is performed (step Y138).

In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "0", the fluctuation start of the special figure 2 variable display game is monitored, and the variable start setting and effect setting of the special figure 2 variable display game, and the special figure 2 variable display game are set. FIG. 2 Special figure 2 for setting information necessary for performing processing during fluctuations Fig. 2 Ordinary processing (step Y139) is performed. In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "1", the special figure 2 sets the stop display time, sets the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 display processing, and the like. 2 Perform the variable processing (step Y140).

In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, the fanfare command is set according to the type of big hit, and each big hit type The special figure 2 display processing (step Y141) for setting the fanfare time according to the large winning opening opening pattern, setting the information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing, and the like is performed.

In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "3", the opening time of the big winning opening is set, the number of opening times is updated, and the information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big winning opening is set. Perform fanfare / interval processing (step Y142). In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "4", the process of setting the interval command if the jackpot round is not the final round, while setting the ending command if it is the final round, or the big winning opening. The large winning opening opening processing (step Y143) for setting the information necessary for performing the remaining ball processing is performed.

In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "5", if the big hit round is the final round, the process of setting the time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged, or the special figure 2 The big winning opening remaining ball processing (step Y144) for setting the information necessary for performing the big hit end processing is performed. In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "6", the special figure 2 jackpot end processing (step Y145) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 normal processing (step Y139). I do.

In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "7", the opening time / opening pattern of the large winning opening when a small hit occurs, the fanfare command is set, and the small hit medium processing is performed. The small hit fanfare middle process (step Y146) for setting the information necessary for the game is performed. In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "8", the small hit middle processing (step Y147) for setting the ending command, setting the information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball processing, and the like is performed. Do.

In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "9", the process of setting the time for the remaining balls that have won in the large winning opening during the small hit medium processing and the small hit end. The small hit remaining ball processing (step Y148) for setting the information necessary for performing the processing is performed. In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "10", the special figure 2 small hit end process (step Y149) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 normal processing is performed.

After that, the special figure 2 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 is prepared (step Y152), and the symbol fluctuation control process (step Y153) related to the special figure 2 display 52 is performed to perform the special figure 2 fluctuation control process. FIG. 2 The game processing is finished. This special figure 2 game process performs a process of performing a series of execution control related to the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game). The above-mentioned special figure 2 game processing basically performs the same processing as the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing for special figure 2, and in the following description, the special figure 1 game processing and the special figure 2 game processing will be described. The corresponding processing will be described in parallel in.

[Great winning opening switch monitoring process]
FIG. 37 shows the big winning opening switch monitoring process (steps Y102, Y132) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process and special figure 2 game process. In this large winning opening switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not the upper winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) is being opened (step Y161). Then, when the upper prize opening is open (step Y161; Y), the process proceeds to step Y166. If the upper prize opening is not open (step Y161; N), it is determined whether the remaining ball processing of the upper prize opening is in progress (step Y162). The remaining ball processing in this determination includes both the large winning opening residual ball processing based on the big hit and the small hit remaining ball processing based on the small hit.

If the remaining ball processing of the upper prize opening is being processed (step Y162; Y), the process proceeds to step Y166. Further, when the remaining ball processing of the upper prize opening is not in progress (step Y162; N), it is determined whether the lower prize opening (second special variable winning device 39) is being opened (step Y163). Then, when the lower prize opening is not open (step Y163; N), the large winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the lower prize opening is open (step Y163; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the lower prize opening switch (step Y164).

The opening in steps Y161 and Y163 means the opening in the first special gaming state, which is a special gaming state based on the first special result (big hit), and the special gaming state based on the second special result (small hit). Includes both during opening in the second special gaming state. Further, in the determination of steps Y161 to Y163, the determination may be made by referring to the special figure 1 or special figure 2 game processing number, or a flag indicating whether or not each state is set may be set. The determination may be made based on this flag.

If there is no input to the lower prize opening switch (step Y164; N), the large winning opening switch monitoring process ends. If there is an input to the lower prize opening switch (step Y164; Y), 1 is set in the winning counter for counting the number of winnings to the winning opening added in the current large winning opening switch monitoring process. (Step Y165), and the process proceeds to step Y175.

On the other hand, in step Y166, which shifts to the case where the upper prize opening is open (step Y161; Y) or the remaining ball processing of the upper prize opening is being processed (step Y162; Y), 0 is set to the winning counter. Set (step Y166). After that, it is determined whether or not there is an input in the upper prize opening switch 1 (one of the upper prize opening switches 38a) (step Y167), and if there is no input (step Y167; N), the process proceeds to step Y171.

Further, when there is an input to the upper prize opening switch 1 (step Y167; Y), the grand prize opening count command is prepared (step Y168), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y169). In the case of the first special variable winning device 38, a large winning opening count command is transmitted in order to produce an effect by winning. Further, the winning counter is updated by +1 (step Y170), and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the upper winning opening switch 2 (the other upper winning opening switch 38a) (step Y171).

Then, when there is no input to the upper prize opening switch 2 (step Y171; N), the process proceeds to step Y175. Further, when there is an input to the upper prize opening switch 2 (step Y171; Y), the grand prize opening count command is prepared (step Y172), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y173). Further, the winning counter is updated by +1 (step Y174), and the process proceeds to step Y175.

After that, when the value of the winning counter is 0 (step Y175; Y), when the large winning opening remaining ball processing is in progress (step Y176; Y), or when the small hit remaining ball processing is in progress (step Y177; Y). If any of the above, the large winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. If the value of the winning counter is not 0 (step Y175; N), the large winning opening remaining ball processing is not in progress (step Y176; N), and the small hit remaining ball processing is not in progress (step Y177; N), the winning is won. The value of the counter is added to the number of large winning openings (step Y178), and it is determined whether or not the number of large winning openings counts is equal to or greater than the upper limit (the number of game balls that can be won in one round) (step Y179).

If the number of large winning opening counts is not equal to or higher than the upper limit value (9 in this case) (step Y179; N), the large winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the number of large winning openings is equal to or greater than the upper limit (step Y179; Y), the number of large winning openings is kept at the upper limit (step Y180), and the target special figure game processing timer area is cleared to 0. (Step Y181). Then, it is determined whether the opening in the big hit, that is, the opening in the first special gaming state which is the special gaming state based on the big hit (step Y182).

If the jackpot is not open (step Y182; N), that is, if the jackpot is open, the jackpot switch monitoring process ends. Further, when the jackpot is being opened (step Y182; Y), the value of the jackpot opening operation end is saved in the jackpot opening control pointer area (step Y183), and the jackpot switch monitoring process is terminated. As a result, the big prize opening will be closed and one round will end.

It should be noted that even when there is an input to the lower prize opening switch (step Y164; Y), the grand prize opening count command may be transmitted to the effect control device 300. Further, when there is a remaining ball processing for the lower prize opening, the large winning opening count command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 even if there is an input to the lower prize opening switch during the remaining ball processing. You can do it.

[Special figure 1 Normal processing]
FIG. 38 shows the special figure 1 normal processing (step Y108) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing. In this special figure 1 normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 can start to fluctuate (step Y201). The state in which the special figure 1 in this determination can start the fluctuation is not between the stop of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, which is a big hit or a small hit, and the end of the special gaming state. In addition, although it is in a state where the fluctuation cannot be started even during the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game or the special game state based on the special figure 1 variable display game, in that case, since the special figure 1 normal processing is not executed. , It is not necessary to judge this here.

When the special figure 1 is not capable of starting fluctuation (step Y201; N), the special figure 1 normal processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y217), and the special figure 1 normal processing is ended. Further, when the special figure 1 is capable of starting fluctuation (step Y201; Y), it is determined whether the left-handed instruction notification has been notified, that is, whether the left-handed instruction notification flag is set (step Y202). If the left-handed instruction has been notified (step Y202; Y), the process proceeds to step Y206. If the left-handed instruction notification has not been notified (step Y202; N), the left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step Y203), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y204). After that, the left-handed instruction notification flag is set (step Y205), and it is determined whether or not the number of holdings in Special Figure 1 is 0 (step Y206). The left-handed instruction notification flag is cleared when the last special figure variation display game played in the specific game state, which is a high probability state, ends, and as a result, the normal game state, which is a low probability state, is cleared. Left-handed instruction notification will be performed when shifting to.

Then, when the number of reserved special figures 1 is 0 (step Y206; Y), the process proceeds to step Y217. Further, when the number of pending special figures 1 is not 0 (step Y206; N), the fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y207), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y208). After that, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process for setting the information related to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is performed (step Y209), and the decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is prepared (step Y210). , Perform the effect command setting process (step Y211). At the time of performing the process of preparing the decorative special figure hold number command (step Y210), the special figure 1 hold number is not subtracted based on the start of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the current special figure 1 hold is not performed. A hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number obtained by subtracting -1 from the number is prepared.

Next, the special figure 1 changing state is set (information addition) in the special figure status area (step Y212). Here, the special figure status indicates the state of the special figure variation display game, and any of 0 to 5 is set. Special figure status 0 indicates a state in which neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is executed, and special figure status 1 indicates a state in which only the special figure 1 variable display game is executed. The special figure status 2 indicates a state in which only the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed. Further, the special figure status 3 indicates a state in which both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are being executed, and the special figure status 4 is the first special game state which is a special game state based on the jackpot. The special figure status 5 indicates that the game is in the second special game state, which is a special game state based on a small hit. Here, since the special figure 1 variable display game is started, 1 or 3 is set as the special figure status.

Next, it is determined whether or not the state is in a high probability state (step Y213). Then, in the case of the high probability state (step Y213; Y), the process proceeds to step Y216. Further, when the state is not in the high probability state (step Y213; N), it is determined whether the high probability final fluctuation is in progress (step Y214). The high-probability final fluctuation means that the special figure fluctuation display game is being executed (including the stop time) for a predetermined number of times (here, the 50th time) from the end of the first special game state, and the lottery is performed in the high-probability state. The last special figure variation display game in which was played is being executed.

If the final fluctuation with high probability is in progress (step Y214; Y), the process proceeds to step Y216. If the final fluctuation with high probability is not in progress (step Y214; N), the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is set (step Y215). That is, the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is set when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is started in a low probability state. After that, the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process is performed (step Y216), and the special figure 1 normal process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 Normal processing]
FIG. 39 shows the special figure 2 normal processing (step Y139) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game processing. In this special figure 2 normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 can start to fluctuate (step Y221). The state in which the special figure 2 in this determination can start the fluctuation is not between the stop of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, which is a big hit or a small hit, and the end of the special gaming state. In addition, although it is in a state where the fluctuation cannot be started even during the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game or the special game state based on the special figure 2 variable display game, in that case, the special figure 2 is in a state where the normal processing is not executed. , It is not necessary to judge this here.

When the special figure 2 is not capable of starting fluctuation (step Y221; N), the special figure 2 normal processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y237), and the special figure 2 normal processing is ended. Further, when the special figure 2 can start to fluctuate (step Y221; Y), it is determined whether or not the number of reserved special figures 2 is 0 (step Y222).

Then, when the number of reserved special figures 2 is not 0 (step Y222; N), the fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y223), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y224). After that, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process for setting the information related to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed (step Y225), and the decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is prepared (step Y226). , The effect command setting process is performed (step Y227). At the time of performing the process of preparing the decorative special figure hold number command (step Y226), the special figure 2 hold number is not subtracted based on the start of the special figure 2 variable display game, and the current special figure 2 hold is not performed. A hold number command corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number, which is -1 from the number, is prepared.

Next, the special figure 2 changing state is set (information addition) in the special figure status area (step Y228). Here, since the special figure 2 variable display game is started, 2 or 3 is set as the special figure status. Then, it is determined whether or not it is in the high probability state (step Y229), and if it is in the high probability state (step Y229; Y), the process proceeds to step Y232. Further, when the state is not in the high probability state (step Y229; N), it is determined whether the high probability final fluctuation is in progress (step Y230). The high-probability final fluctuation means that the special figure fluctuation display game is being executed (including the stop time) for a predetermined number of times (here, the 50th time) from the end of the first special game state, and the lottery is performed in the high-probability state. The last special figure variation display game in which was played is being executed.

If the final fluctuation with high probability is in progress (step Y230; Y), the process proceeds to step Y232. If the final fluctuation with high probability is not in progress (step Y230; N), the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is set (step Y231). That is, the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is set when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is started in a low probability state. After that, the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process is performed (step Y232), and the special figure 2 normal process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the special figure 2 hold number is 0 (step Y222; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 hold number is 0 (step Y233). Then, when the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is 0 (step Y233; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is changing (step Y234). Then, when the special figure 1 is not changing (step Y234; N), it is determined whether the customer waiting demo has been started (step Y235), and when it has not been disclosed (step Y235; N), it is in the customer waiting state. Performs processing related to settings. Further, when the number of reserved special figures 1 is not 0 (step Y233; N), when special figure 1 is changing (step Y234; Y), or when the customer waiting demo has already started (step Y235; Y). , Step Y239.

In the process related to the setting of the customer waiting state, first, the customer waiting demo flag area is set (step Y236), the customer waiting demo command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y237), and the effect is produced. The command setting process is performed (step Y238), and the process proceeds to step Y239. By making the customer waiting demo command correspond to the current probability state, it is possible to display different customer waiting screens according to the probability state.

Further, if the effect control device 300 is restarted for some reason, the effect control device 300 that does not have the backup function loses the game state information, so that it becomes impossible to perform an appropriate effect. By making the waiting demo command correspond to the current probability state, it is possible to perform an effect according to the game state from the reception of this command, and the probability information command based on the change in the game state is transmitted. You will be able to return to the production according to the game state faster than waiting.

Further, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed at the same time, and it is conceivable that the probability state changes depending on the processing of the special figure 1 variable display game. Therefore, the fluctuation start probability information command is transmitted every time the special figure fluctuation display game is started (steps Y207 and Y223). As a result, the effect control device 300 can perform an appropriate effect according to the game state.

In addition, by transmitting the fluctuation start probability information command every time the special figure fluctuation display game starts, even if the effect control device 300 is restarted, the effect according to the game state can be performed from the reception of this command. This makes it possible to return to the effect according to the game state faster than waiting for the probability information command based on the change in the game state to be transmitted. It should be noted that the customer waiting demo command and the fluctuation start probability information command may include other information for allowing the effect control device 300 to return to the effect according to the game state when the effect control device 300 is restarted.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation Start Processing]
FIG. 40 shows the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step Y209) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 normal process. This special figure 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 1 variation display game. First, the special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step Y241), and the result information of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is out of alignment information. , The big hit flag 1 setting process (step Y242) for setting the big hit information or the small hit information is performed.

Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step Y243) related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is set. The information setting process (step Y244) is performed, and the special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to the setting of the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game is set, is prepared (step Y244). Step Y245).

After that, the special figure variation pattern setting process (step Y246) for setting the variation pattern which is the variation mode in the special figure 1 variation display game is performed, and the variation start information setting process for setting the variation start information of the special figure 1 variation display game is performed. (Step Y247) is performed. By these processes, the result and the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game to be executed are determined. After that, the high-probability fluctuation number update process for managing the period of the high-probability state is performed (step Y248), and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is completed.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
FIG. 41 shows the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step Y225) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 normal process. This special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 2 variation display game. First, the special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step Y261), and the result information of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is out of alignment information. , The big hit flag 2 setting process (step Y262) for setting the big hit information or the small hit information is performed.

Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step Y263) related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is set. The information setting process (step Y264) is performed, and the special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to the setting of the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game is set, is prepared ((step Y264). Step Y265).

After that, the special figure variation pattern setting process (step Y266) for setting the variation pattern which is the variation mode in the special figure 2 variation display game is performed, and the variation start information setting process for setting the variation start information of the special figure 2 variation display game is performed. (Step Y267) is performed. By these processes, the result and the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game to be executed are determined. After that, the high-probability fluctuation number update process for managing the period in which the high-probability state is set is performed (step Y268), and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is terminated.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
FIG. 42 shows the jackpot flag 1 setting process (step Y242) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process. In this big hit flag 1 setting process, first, the deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 1 area (step Y271), and the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step Y272). Next, the jackpot random number is loaded and prepared (step Y273) from the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) of RWM, and the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0. The number of hold 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 1).

After that, it is determined whether the jackpot flag 2 which is the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure 2 variable display game being executed is a jackpot (step Y275), and if it is a jackpot (step Y275; Y), the process proceeds to step Y279. To do. That is, both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game that are executed at the same time are not big hits. If it is not a big hit (step Y275; N), a big hit determination process (step Y276) is performed to determine whether or not the acquired big hit random value is a big hit depending on whether or not it matches the big hit determination value.

Then, when the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step Y276) is a jackpot (step Y277; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 1 area where the loss information was saved in step Y272 (step Y278). ), The jackpot flag 1 setting process is completed. On the other hand, when the judgment result of the big hit determination process (step Y276) is not a big hit (step Y277; N), whether or not the acquired big hit random number value is a small hit depending on whether or not it matches the small hit determination value. The small hit determination process (step Y279) for determining the above is performed.

Then, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step Y279) is a small hit (step Y280; Y), the small hit information is overwritten and saved in the small hit flag 1 area where the loss information is saved in step Y271. (Step Y281), the jackpot flag 1 setting process is completed. On the other hand, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step Y279) is not a small hit (step Y280; N), the large hit flag 1 setting process ends. In this case, the loss information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area and the small hit flag 1 area.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
FIG. 43 shows the jackpot flag 2 setting process (step Y262) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start process. In this big hit flag 2 setting process, first, the deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 2 area (step Y291), and the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step Y292). Next, the jackpot random number is loaded and prepared from the special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) of RWM (step Y293), and the special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area is cleared to 0. The number of hold 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 2).

After that, it is determined whether the jackpot flag 1 which is the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure 1 variable display game being executed is a jackpot (step Y295), and if it is a jackpot (step Y295; Y), the process proceeds to step Y299. To do. That is, both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game that are executed at the same time are not big hits. If it is not a big hit (step Y295; N), a big hit determination process (step Y296) is performed to determine whether or not the acquired big hit random value is a big hit depending on whether or not it matches the big hit determination value.

Then, when the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step Y296) is a jackpot (step Y297; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 2 area where the loss information was saved in step Y292 (step Y298). ), The jackpot flag 2 setting process is completed. On the other hand, when the judgment result of the big hit determination process (step Y296) is not a big hit (step Y297; N), whether or not the acquired big hit random number value is a small hit depending on whether or not it matches the small hit determination value. The small hit determination process (step Y299) for determining the above is performed.

Then, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step Y299) is a small hit (step Y300; Y), the small hit information is overwritten and saved in the small hit flag 2 area where the loss information is saved in step Y291. (Step Y301), the jackpot flag 2 setting process is completed. On the other hand, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step Y299) is not a small hit (step Y300; N), the large hit flag 2 setting process ends. In this case, the loss information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area and the small hit flag 2 area.

[Big hit judgment process]
FIG. 44 shows the jackpot determination processing (steps Y276, Y296) in the jackpot flag 1 setting process and the jackpot flag 2 setting process described above. In this jackpot determination process, first, the lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value is set (step Y311), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step Y312). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or higher than the lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and is equal to or less than the upper limit judgment value which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value. , It is judged to be a big hit.

When the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step Y312; Y), that is, when it is not a jackpot, a deviation is set as the determination result (step Y317), and the jackpot determination process is terminated. In addition, the loss as a judgment result indicates that the lottery for the big hit has been missed. Further, when the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step Y312; N), it is determined whether the state is in a high probability state (step Y313).

Then, in the case of the high probability state (step Y313; Y), the upper limit determination value in the high probability is set (step Y314), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step Y316). ). If the probability is not high (step Y313; N), the upper limit determination value in the low probability is set (step Y315), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step Y316). ..

If the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step Y316; Y), that is, if it is not a jackpot, a deviation is set as the determination result (step Y317), and the jackpot determination process is terminated. If the value of the jackpot random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step Y316; N), that is, if it is a jackpot, a jackpot is set as the determination result (step Y318), and the jackpot determination process is terminated.

[Small hit judgment processing]
FIG. 45 shows the small hit determination process (steps Y279, Y299) in the above-mentioned big hit flag 1 setting process and big hit flag 2 setting process. In this small hit determination process, first, it is determined whether the value of the target large hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step Y321). The small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is equal to or more than the lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value which is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. In some cases, it is determined to be a small hit. Moreover, the big hit judgment value and the small hit judgment value do not overlap.

When the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step Y321; Y), that is, when it is not a small hit, a deviation is set as the determination result (step Y326), and the small hit determination process is terminated. In addition, the loss as a judgment result indicates that the lottery for small hits has been missed. When the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step Y321; N), it is determined whether the information of the special figure 1 is being set, that is, whether the determination is for the special figure 1 variation display game. (Step Y322).

Then, when the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step Y322; Y), the small hit upper limit determination value for the special figure 1 is set (step Y323), and the value of the target big hit random number is the small hit upper limit determination value. It is determined whether it is larger (step Y325). Further, when the information of the special figure 1 is not set (step Y322; N), that is, when the judgment is about the special figure 2 variable display game, the small hit upper limit judgment value for the special figure 2 is set (step Y324). , It is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step Y325).

If the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step Y325; Y), that is, if it is not a small hit, a deviation is set as the determination result (step Y326), and the small hit determination process is terminated. If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step Y325; N), that is, if it is a small hit, a small hit is set as the determination result (step Y327), and the small hit determination process is completed. To do.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 46 shows the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step Y243) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process. In this special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step Y331), and if it is a big hit (step Y331; Y), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (holding number 1). Load the jackpot symbol random number from (for) (step Y332). Next, the special figure 1 jackpot symbol table is set (step Y333), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area (step Y334). The jackpot type is selected by this process. The stop symbol of the special figure 1 variable display game is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area instead of the special figure 1 stop symbol area when a special result is derived in the special figure 2 variable display game. This is because there is a possibility that the result will be forcibly removed.

After that, the special figure 1 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step Y335), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the stop symbol pattern is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern area (step Y336). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol display (here, the special diagram 1 display 51) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area (step Y337), and the large winning opening opening information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired. Special figure 1 Save in the large winning opening opening information area (step Y338). This information is for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state. Then, the decorative special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y346).

On the other hand, when it is not a big hit (step Y331; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step Y339), and when it is a small hit (step Y339; Y), the special figure 1 small hit symbol The small hit symbol random number is loaded from the random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) (step Y340). Next, the special figure 1 small hit symbol table is set (step Y341), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area (step Y342). The small hit type is selected by this process. After that, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern area (step Y343), and the decorative special symbol 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y346).

If the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step Y339; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area (step Y344), and the missed stop symbol pattern is stopped in special figure 1. Save in the symbol pattern area (step Y345), and prepare the decorative special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (step Y346). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, the decorative special figure 1 command is saved in the decorative special figure 1 command area (step Y347), and the effect command setting process (step Y348) is performed. This decorative special figure 1 command is later transmitted to the effect control device 300. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y349), the special figure 1 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y350), and the special figure The 1 small hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of holdings 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y351), and the special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process is completed.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 47 shows the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step Y263) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start process. The special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is the same process as the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process for the special figure 2. In this special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step Y361), and if it is a big hit (step Y361; Y), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (holding number 1). Load the jackpot symbol random number from (for) (step Y362). Next, the special figure 2 jackpot symbol table is set (step Y363), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area (step Y364). The jackpot type is selected by this process. The stop symbol of the special figure 2 variable display game is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area instead of the special figure 2 stop symbol area when a special result is derived in the special figure 1 variable display game. This is because there is a possibility that the result will be forcibly removed.

After that, the special figure 2 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step Y365), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the stop symbol pattern is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern area (step Y366). The stop symbol pattern is for setting the stop symbol on the special symbol display (here, the special diagram 2 display 52) and the stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 round number upper limit value information area (step Y367), and the large winning opening opening information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired. Special figure 2 Save in the large winning opening opening information area (step Y368). This information is for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state. Then, the decorative special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y376).

On the other hand, when it is not a big hit (step Y361; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step Y369), and when it is a small hit (step Y369; Y), the special figure 2 small hit symbol The small hit symbol random number is loaded from the random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) (step Y370). Next, the special figure 2 small hit symbol table is set (step Y371), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area (step Y372). The small hit type is selected by this process. After that, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern area (step Y373), and the decorative special symbol 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y376).

If the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step Y369; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area (step Y374), and the missed stop symbol pattern is stopped in special figure 2. Save in the symbol pattern area (step Y375), and prepare the decorative special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (step Y376). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, the decorative special figure 2 command is saved in the decorative special figure 2 command area (step Y377), and the effect command setting process (step Y378) is performed. This decorative special figure 2 command is later transmitted to the effect control device 300. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y379), the special figure 2 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y380), and the special figure The 2 small hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y381), and the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is completed.

[Special figure information setting process]
FIG. 48 shows the special figure information setting processing (steps Y244, Y264) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special drawing 2 fluctuation start processing. This special figure information setting process is a process common to the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. When the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is performed, the special figure 1 is set as the target special figure, and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is performed. If so, processing is performed using the special figure 2 as the target special figure.

In this special figure information setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the probability is high (step Y401). If the probability is not high (step Y401; N), the low-probability time variation pattern selection information table is set (step Y402), and the first half offset data and the second half offset data corresponding to the stop symbol pattern of the target special figure are acquired. (Step Y403), it is determined whether the target special figure is a big hit, that is, whether the stop symbol pattern of the target special figure is a big hit stop symbol pattern (step Y404).

If the target special figure is a big hit (step Y404; Y), the process proceeds to step Y412. When the target special figure is not a big hit (step Y404; N), it is determined whether the target special figure is a small hit, that is, the stop symbol pattern of the target special figure is a small hit stop symbol pattern (step). Y405). Then, when the target special figure is not a small hit (step Y405; N), that is, when it is out of alignment, the special figure hold number is added to the first half offset data to convert the value (step Y407), and the process proceeds to step Y412. To do. If the target special figure is a small hit (step Y405; Y), the process proceeds to step Y412.

On the other hand, when the probability is high (step Y401; Y), the high probability fluctuation pattern selection information table is set (step Y408), and the first half offset data and the second half offset data corresponding to the stop symbol pattern of the target special figure are set. (Step Y409), and the process proceeds to step Y412.

Then, the first half offset data set as described above is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area (step Y412), the latter half offset data is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area (step Y413), and the special figure information is set. End the process.

In other words, in the special figure fluctuation display game in the normal game state, the fluctuation pattern is determined in consideration of the number of special figure reservations only for the first half fluctuation pattern in the case of a miss, and the number of special figure reservations is determined in the case of a big hit or a small hit. Allow the variation pattern to be determined without consideration. Further, in the special figure variation display game in the specific game state, the variation pattern is determined without considering the number of special figure reservations.

[Special figure fluctuation pattern setting process]
FIG. 49 shows the special figure fluctuation pattern setting processing (steps Y246, Y266) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. The fluctuation patterns are the first half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation mode from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game to the reach state, and the second half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation mode from the reach state to the end of the special figure fluctuation display game. It consists of a pattern, and the latter half fluctuation pattern is set first, and then the first half fluctuation pattern is set.

In this special figure 1 variation pattern setting process, first, the variation group selection address table is set (step Y451), and the address of the latter half variation group table corresponding to the variation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step Y452). , The variation pattern random number 1 is loaded and prepared from the variation pattern random number 1 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) of the target special figure (step Y453).

Next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is out of alignment, that is, whether the stop symbol pattern is an out-of-order stop symbol pattern (step Y454), and if the target special figure is out of alignment (step Y454; Y), a 2-byte distribution process is performed. (Step Y455), and the process proceeds to step Y457. If the target special figure is not out of alignment (step Y454; N), the distribution process is performed (step Y456), and the process proceeds to step Y457. When the result is a big hit or a small hit, the distribution value is 1 byte, but when the result is out of order, the distribution value is 2 bytes in order to enable various effects.

Then, the address of the latter half variation selection table obtained as a result of distribution is acquired and prepared (step Y457), and the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) of the target special figure. And prepare (step Y458). Then, the distribution process (step Y459) is performed, the latter half variable number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired, and the latter half variable number area is saved (step Y460). By this process, the latter half fluctuation pattern is set.

Next, the first half fluctuation group table is set (step Y461), and the table selection pointer is calculated based on the second half fluctuation number determined as the fluctuation distribution information 1 (step Y462). Then, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (step Y463), and the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the number of hold 1) of the target special figure. And prepare (step Y464).

After that, the distribution process (step Y465) is performed, the first half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the first half variation number area (step Y467), and the special figure variation pattern setting process is completed. By this process, the first half fluctuation pattern is set, and the fluctuation pattern for the entire period of the special figure fluctuation display game to be started is set.

[2-byte distribution processing]
FIG. 50 shows a 2-byte distribution process (step Y455) in the above-mentioned special figure variation pattern setting process. The 2-byte distribution process is a process for selecting the latter half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the latter half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

In this 2-byte distribution process, first, it is checked whether the first data of the prepared second-half variable group table (selection table) is a code without distribution (that is, "0") (step Y501). Here, the latter half fluctuation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one latter half fluctuation pattern group, but the latter half that defines only the latter half fluctuation pattern group in which the latter half fluctuation pattern is "no reach". In the variable group table, since there is no need for distribution, the distribution value "0", that is, the code without distribution is specified at the beginning.

Then, when the first data of the latter half variable group table is a code without distribution (step Y502; Y), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step Y507), and the 2-byte distribution process is completed. To do. On the other hand, when the first data of the latter half variable group table is not a code without distribution (step Y502; N), one distribution value first specified in the latter half variable group table is acquired (step Y503).

Next, a new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step Y373 from the loaded random number value (value of fluctuation pattern random number 1) (step Y504), and the calculated new random number value is calculated. Is less than "0" (step Y505). If the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (step Y505; N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step Y506), the process shifts to step Y503, and the subsequent processing is performed. Do. That is, in step Y503, after acquiring the distribution value specified next in the variable group selection table, the distribution value is subtracted by using the random number value determined in step Y505 as a new random number value, and further new disturbance. Calculate the numerical value (step Y504). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step Y505).

The above process is executed in step Y505 until it is determined that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step Y505; Y). As a result, any one of the latter half fluctuation selection tables is selected from at least one latter half fluctuation selection table defined in the latter half fluctuation group table. Then, in step Y505, when it is determined that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step Y505; Y), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step Y507), and the 2-byte distribution process is performed. To finish.

[Distribution processing]
FIG. 51 shows the distribution processing (steps Y456, Y459, Y465) in the above-mentioned special figure variation pattern setting process and special figure variation pattern setting process. In the distribution process, the second half fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game is selected from the second half fluctuation selection table (second half fluctuation pattern group) based on the fluctuation pattern random number 2, or the first half fluctuation selection table (first half fluctuation selection table) based on the fluctuation pattern random number 3. This is a process for selecting the first half fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game from the first half fluctuation pattern group).

In this sorting process, first, it is checked whether or not the first data of the prepared second half variable selection table (selection table) and first half variable selection table (selection table) is a code without sorting (that is, "0"). (Step Y511). Here, the latter half fluctuation selection table and the first half fluctuation selection table store a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one second half fluctuation pattern or the first half fluctuation pattern, as in the latter half fluctuation group table, but distribution is necessary. In the case of a selection table without a distribution value, the distribution value "0", that is, the code without distribution is specified at the beginning.

Then, when the data at the head of the second half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table is a code without distribution (step Y512; Y), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step Y517), and the distribution is performed. End the process. On the other hand, when the data at the beginning of the second half fluctuation selection table or the first half fluctuation selection table is not a code without distribution (step Y512; N), the first distribution value specified in the second half fluctuation selection table or the first half fluctuation selection table is set. (Step Y513).

Next, after subtracting the distribution value acquired in step Y513 from the loaded random number value (value of fluctuation pattern random number 2 or fluctuation pattern random number 3) to calculate a new random number value (step Y514), the calculation is performed. It is determined whether the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step Y515). Then, when the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (step Y515; N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step Y516), the process shifts to step Y513, and thereafter. Perform processing.

That is, in step Y513, after acquiring the distribution value specified next in the second half fluctuation selection table and the first half fluctuation selection table, the distribution value is subtracted by using the random number value determined in step Y515 as a new random number value. , Further calculate a new random number value (step Y514). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step Y515).

The above process is executed in step Y515 until it is determined that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step Y515; Y). As a result, any one of the latter half fluctuation number and the first half fluctuation number is selected from at least one second half fluctuation pattern and the first half fluctuation pattern defined in the second half fluctuation selection table and the first half fluctuation selection table. Then, in step Y515, when it is determined that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step Y515; Y), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step Y517), and the distribution process is completed. To do.

[Fluctuation start information setting process]
FIG. 52 shows the fluctuation start information setting processing (steps Y247, Y267) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special drawing 2 fluctuation start processing. In this fluctuation start information setting process, first, it is determined whether the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step Y551), and when the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step Y551; Y), the information of the special figure 1 is set. The random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) of the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 is cleared (step Y552). Further, when the information of the special figure 1 is not set (step Y551; N), that is, when the information of the special figure 2 is being set, the random number storage area of the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 of the special figure 2 is cleared (step). Y553).

Next, the first half fluctuation time value table is set (step Y554), and the first half fluctuation time value corresponding to the first half fluctuation number is acquired (step Y555). Further, the latter half fluctuation time value table is set (step Y556), and the latter half fluctuation time value corresponding to the latter half fluctuation number is acquired (step Y557). Then, the first half fluctuation time value and the second half fluctuation time value are added (step Y558), and the added value is saved in the target special figure game processing timer area (step Y559).

After that, the variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number is prepared (step Y564), the variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number is prepared (step Y565), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y566). ). Next, the number of reserved special figures of the target is updated by -1 (step Y568), the contents of the random number storage area of the target special figure are shifted (step Y569), and the free area after the shift is cleared (step Y570). , Ends the fluctuation start information setting process.

By the above processing, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 can determine the result and the variation mode information of the variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game, special figure 2 variation display game) based on the start memory stored in the start storage means. Make a decision. Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern determining means capable of determining the variation pattern of the identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

Then, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is later transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. Decorate special figure variable display Set detailed production contents in the game. Information on the start of these special figure variation display games includes a decorative special figure hold number command including information on the number of start memories (holds), a decorative special figure command including information on a stop symbol, and a variation of the special figure variation display game. Examples include variable commands that include information about patterns. By transmitting the decorative special figure command before the variable command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a first variable display game execution control means capable of performing execution control of the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game). Further, it can be said that the first variable display game execution control means performs a series of execution control related to the first variable display game from the whole of the special figure 1 game processing. Further, the game control device 100 serves as a second variation display game execution control means capable of performing execution control of the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game). Further, it can be said that the second variable display game execution control means performs a series of execution control related to the second variable display game from the whole of the special figure 2 game processing.

Further, the game control device 100 can transmit the result and variation mode information of the first variation display game and the result and variation mode information of the second variation display game to the effect control means (effect control device 300) as control information. A means of transmission. Further, when the game control device 100 starts measuring the fluctuation time for each of the first fluctuation display game and the second fluctuation display game according to the start of the fluctuation display game, and the measurement time elapses. It serves as a measurement means for ending the measurement of the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display game.

[High probability fluctuation frequency update process]
FIG. 53 shows the high-probability fluctuation number update processing (steps Y248, Y268) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special drawing 2 fluctuation start processing. In this high-probability fluctuation number update process, first, it is determined whether or not the high probability is in the high probability (step Y581), and if the high probability is not in the high probability (step Y581; N), the high probability fluctuation number update process is terminated. In the case of high probability (step Y581; Y), the number of high-probability fluctuations for managing the number of executions of the special figure variation display game in the high-probability state is updated by -1 (step Y582), and the number of high-probability fluctuations is high. Is 0 (step Y583).

When the high-probability fluctuation count is not 0 (step Y583; N), that is, when the high-probability state continues, the high-probability fluctuation count update process ends. When the number of high-probability fluctuations is 0 (step Y583; Y), that is, when the high-probability state ends, the signal relating to the end of the high-probability state and the time-saving state is saved in the external information output data area (step Y584). .. Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to be turned off. Further, the signal relating to the end of the high probability state and the time saving state is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y585). Here, the special symbol 1 high-probability state signal is set to OFF, the special symbol 2 high-probability state signal is set to OFF, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal is set to OFF, and the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal is set to OFF.

Further, the low probability state and the number during no time reduction are saved in the game state display number area (step Y586), and the special figure low probability flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y587). Then, the high-probability final fluctuation flag corresponding to the symbol whose fluctuation starts is set (step Y588), the normal-figure low-probability flag is saved in the normal-figure game mode flag area (step Y589), and the high-probability fluctuation count update process is performed. finish.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the high probability state is set until the special figure variation display game is executed a predetermined number of times after the end of the special game state, but the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display are set. Since the games can be executed at the same time, the high-probability variation number update process for managing the number of high-probability states is performed at the start of the special figure variation display game. If the game machine does not execute the other special figure variation display game while the other special figure variation display game is being executed as in the conventional case, the probability state is set by the end of the special figure variation display game for the predetermined number of times. If you change to the low probability state, no problem will occur. However, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed at the same time as in the game machine of the present embodiment, the probability state is set to a low probability at the end of the predetermined number of special figure variable display games. If the state is changed, the judgment is made in a high probability state even for the other special figure fluctuation display game that is started during the execution of the one special figure fluctuation display game, and the high probability is made over a predetermined number of times. The game can be executed in the state. Therefore, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed at the same time as in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, one of the special figure variable display games, which is a predetermined number of times, is played in a high probability state. After the judgment, it is necessary to set the low probability state by the start of the other special figure variation display game. Here, immediately after the processing at the start of one special figure variation display game, which is the predetermined number of times, is completed. It is possible to change to a low probability state.

Since the high-probability fluctuation number update process is performed at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game, the change of the special figure fluctuation display game is performed for the last special figure fluctuation display game in which the lottery is performed in the high probability state. It is already in a low probability state during display. Therefore, if another process refers to the actual probability state during the variation display of the special figure variation display game, the process is performed assuming that the probability state is low, which may cause inconvenience. is there. Therefore, the high-probability final fluctuation flag is set so that the special figure fluctuation display game can be treated as a game being executed as a high-probability state. Further, the high-probability final fluctuation flag is information that can determine whether the last special figure fluctuation display game in which the lottery is performed in the high probability state is the special figure 1 fluctuation display game or the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. Includes.

[Special Figure 1 Processing during change Transition setting processing]
FIG. 54 shows the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process (step Y216) in the special figure 1 normal process. In the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process, first, "1" is set as the special figure 1 game process number (step Y601), and the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y602).

Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step Y603), and the signal relating to the start of fluctuation in FIG. 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y604). Here, the special symbol 1 changing signal is set to ON. After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step Y605), and the initial value (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 1 display 51) of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 1 display 51) is saved in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area. For example, 100 ms) is set (step Y606). Further, the initial value is set in the special figure 1 changing symbol number area (step Y607), and the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process is terminated.

Special figure 1 The initial value set in the symbol number area during fluctuation is 0, so that the fluctuation display is started from the state in which all the segments are turned off. Since at least one segment is lit in the state where the result mode is displayed, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variation display has started by starting the variation display from the state where all the segments are turned off.

[Special Figure 2 Processing during fluctuation Transition setting processing]
FIG. 55 shows the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process (step Y230) in the special figure 2 normal process. In the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process, first, "1" is set as the special figure 2 game process number (step Y611), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y612).

Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step Y613), and the signal relating to the start of fluctuation in FIG. 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y614). Here, the special symbol 2 changing signal is set to ON. After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step Y615), and the initial value (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 2 indicator 52) of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 2 indicator 52) is saved in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area. For example, 100 ms) is set (step Y616). Further, the initial value is set in the special figure 2 changing symbol number area (step Y617), and the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process is terminated.

Special figure 2 The initial value set in the symbol number area during fluctuation is 0, so that the fluctuation display is started from the state where all the segments are turned off. Since at least one segment is lit in the state where the result mode is displayed, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variation display has started by starting the variation display from the state where all the segments are turned off.

It should be noted that when the variable display is started on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, it is assumed that all the segments are turned off, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the variation display may be started from a lighting mode different from the lighting mode of any result mode, and if there is a segment that is not used in any result mode, the variation display is started from at least the state in which the segment is lit. You may try to do it. In addition, the variable display may be started from the state in which the same segment is always lit each time. Further, the lighting mode when the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 start the fluctuation may be the same or different.

[Special Figure 1 Processing during fluctuation]
FIG. 56 shows the special figure 1 changing process (step Y109) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process. In this special figure 1 changing process, first, the number of times the symbol is fixed is updated by +1 (step Y621), a command is loaded and prepared from the decorative special figure 1 command area (step Y622), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step Y623).

Next, the decorative special figure 1 stop command is prepared (step Y624), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y625). Since the gaming machine of the present embodiment may be forcibly stopped before the fluctuation time set at the start of the fluctuation, a stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when the fluctuation is stopped. ..

After that, it is determined whether the final variation has a high probability (step Y626). If the special figure 1 variation display game has a high probability final variation, the high probability final variation flag of the special figure 1 is set. Then, when it is not the final fluctuation with high probability (step Y626; N), the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y627), and the process proceeds to step Y629. Further, in the case of a high-probability final fluctuation (step Y626; Y), the display time at the time of the high-probability final fluctuation is set (step Y628), and the process proceeds to step Y629. The display time (stop time) of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game set here is 600 ms in the case of a miss, 2000 ms in the case of a big hit, and 136 ms in the case of a small hit, unless it is a high-probability final fluctuation. Display time is set. Further, in the case of a high probability final fluctuation, a display time of 2000 ms is set regardless of the result.

After that, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is out of alignment, that is, whether the result of the special drawing 1 variation display game is out of alignment (step Y629). If it is out of the special figure 1 (step Y629; Y), the process proceeds to step Y644. Further, if the special figure 1 is not out of alignment (step Y629; N), that is, if it is a big hit or a small hit, it is determined whether the special figure 2 variable display game is also being executed (step Y630). Whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is running can be grasped by referring to the special figure status.

Then, when the special figure 2 variation display game is not being executed (step Y630; Y), the process proceeds to step Y640. Further, when the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed (step Y630; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 display process is being performed (step Y631). That is, in this case, based on the special figure 1 variable display game having a special result, the running special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped with a disengagement result. Note that even if the special figure 2 variable display game has already finished the variable display but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it is also subject to forced stop.

If the process during display of special figure 2 is in progress (step Y631; Y), the process proceeds to step Y633. If the special figure 2 is not being processed during display (step Y631; N), the number of times the symbol is fixed is updated by +1 (step Y632), and the display time of the special figure 1 set above as the display time of the special figure 2 is set. The display time of +4 ms is set (step Y633). By setting the display time of the special figure 1 + the display time of 4 ms as the display time of the special figure 2, the display times of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 end at the same time. Even if the special figure 2 variable display game is already in the display time, the display time is reset and a new display time is started.

Next, the display time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y634), the command is loaded and prepared from the decorative special figure 2 command area (step Y635), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y636). ). After that, the decorative special figure 2 stop command is prepared (step Y637), the effect command setting process is performed (step Y638), and the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 is performed (step Y639).

Then, the command is loaded from the decorative special figure 1 command area and saved in the hit symbol command area (step Y640), and whether the special figure 1 is a small hit, that is, whether the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a small hit. Is determined (step Y641). In the case of a special figure 1 small hit (step Y641; Y), the process proceeds to step Y644. If it is not a special figure 1 small hit (step Y641; N), that is, if it is a big hit, information is loaded from the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step Y642). ), Special figure 1 Loads information from the large winning opening opening information area and saves it in the large winning opening opening information area (step Y643).

After that, the information is loaded from the special figure 1 stop symbol save area and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (step Y644), the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1 is performed (step Y645), and the special figure 1 is performed. Ends the process being displayed.

[Special Figure 2 Processing during fluctuation]
FIG. 57 shows the special figure 2 changing process (step Y140) in the special figure 2 game process described above. In this special figure 2 changing process, first, the number of times the symbol is confirmed is updated by +1 (step Y651), a command is loaded and prepared from the decorative special figure 2 command area (step Y652), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step Y653).

Next, the decorative special figure 2 stop command is prepared (step Y654), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y655). After that, it is determined whether the final variation has a high probability (step Y656). If the special figure 2 variation display game has a high probability final variation, the high probability final variation flag of the special figure 2 is set.

Then, when it is not the final fluctuation with high probability (step Y656; N), the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y657), and the process proceeds to step Y659. Further, in the case of a high-probability final fluctuation (step Y656; Y), the display time at the time of the high-probability final fluctuation is set (step Y658), and the process proceeds to step Y659. The display time (stop time) of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game set here is 600 ms in the case of a miss, 2000 ms in the case of a big hit, and 136 ms in the case of a small hit, unless it is a high-probability final fluctuation. Display time is set. Further, in the case of a high probability final fluctuation, a display time of 2000 ms is set regardless of the result.

After that, it is determined whether the special figure 2 is out of alignment, that is, whether the result of the special drawing 2 variation display game is out of alignment (step Y659). If it is out of the special figure 2 (step Y659; Y), the process proceeds to step Y674. Further, if the special figure 2 is not out of alignment (step Y659; N), that is, if it is a big hit or a small hit, it is determined whether the special figure 1 variable display game is also being executed (step Y660). Whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is running can be grasped by referring to the special figure status.

Then, when the special figure 1 variation display game is not being executed (step Y660; Y), the process proceeds to step Y670. Further, when the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed (step Y660; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 display process is being performed (step Y661). That is, in this case, based on the special figure 2 variable display game having a special result, the running special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped with a disengagement result. Note that even if the special figure 1 variable display game has already finished the variable display but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it is also subject to forced stop.

If the process during display of special figure 1 is in progress (step Y661; Y), the process proceeds to step Y664. Further, when the special figure 1 display is not being processed (step Y661; N), the number of times the symbol is confirmed is updated by +1 (step Y662), and the process proceeds to step Y664.

Next, the display time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y664), the command is loaded and prepared from the decorative special figure 1 command area (step Y665), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y666). ). After that, the decorative special figure 1 stop command is prepared (step Y667), the effect command setting process is performed (step Y668), and the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 is performed (step Y669).

Then, the command is loaded from the decorative special figure 2 command area and saved in the hit symbol command area (step Y670), and whether the special figure 2 is a small hit, that is, whether the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit. Is determined (step Y671). In the case of a special figure 2 small hit (step Y671; Y), the process proceeds to step Y674. If it is not a special figure 2 small hit (step Y671; N), that is, if it is a big hit, information is loaded from the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step Y672). ), Special figure 2 Loads information from the large winning opening opening information area and saves it in the large winning opening opening information area (step Y673).

After that, the information is loaded from the special figure 2 stop symbol save area and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (step Y674), the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1 is performed (step Y675), and the special figure 2 is performed. Ends the process being displayed.

[Special Figure 1 Displaying Process Transition Setting Process 1]
FIG. 58 shows the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1 (step Y645) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 changing process. In the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1, first, the special figure 1 game process number “2” related to the special figure 1 display process is set (step Y681), and the process number is set in the special figure 1 game process number area. Is saved (step Y682).

Next, the signal relating to the end of the fluctuation of FIG. 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y683). Here, the special symbol 1 changing signal is set to OFF. After that, as information for controlling the special figure 1 fluctuation display game on the special figure 1 display 51, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the special figure 1 display 51 is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step Y684). ), Special figure 1 Ends the process transition setting process 1 during the change.

[Special Figure 2 Displaying Process Transition Setting Process 1]
FIG. 59 shows the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1 (step Y675) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 changing process. In the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1, first, the special figure 2 game process number “2” related to the special figure 2 display process is set (step Y691), and the process number is set in the special figure 2 game process number area. Is saved (step Y692).

Next, the signal relating to the end of the fluctuation of FIG. 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y693). Here, the special symbol 2 changing signal is set to OFF. After that, as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game on the special figure 2 display 52, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the special figure 2 display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step Y694). ), Special figure 2 Ends the process transition setting process 1 during fluctuation.

[Special Figure 1 Displaying Process Transition Setting Process 2]
FIG. 60 shows the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 (step Y669) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 changing process. In the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2, first, the special figure 1 game process number “2” related to the special figure 1 display process is set (step Y701), and the process number is set in the special figure 1 game process number area. Is saved (step Y702).

Next, the signal relating to the end of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y703), and then, as information for controlling the special figure 1 fluctuation display game on the special figure 1 display 51, the special figure 1 The stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the display 51 is saved in the fluctuation control flag area of FIG. 1 (step Y704).

Up to this point, the process is the same as that of the above-mentioned special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1, and the information for obtaining the loss result is set below. First, the stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step Y705), and the special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area is cleared (step Y706).

Next, the special figure 1 large winning opening opening information area is cleared (step Y707), the deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 1 area (step Y708), and the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step Y709). ). Then, the special figure 1 stop symbol save area is cleared (step Y710), the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (step Y711), and the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 is terminated. ..

[Special Figure 2 Displaying Process Transition Setting Process 2]
FIG. 61 shows the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 (step Y639) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 changing process. In the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2, first, the special figure 2 game process number “2” related to the special figure 2 display process is set (step Y721), and the process number is set in the special figure 2 game process number area. Is saved (step Y722).

Next, the signal relating to the end of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y723), and then, as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game on the special figure 2 display 52, the special figure 2 is used. The stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the display 52 is saved in the fluctuation control flag area of FIG. 2 (step Y724).

Up to this point, the process is the same as that of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1, and the information for obtaining the loss result is set below. First, the stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step Y725), and the special figure 2 round number upper limit value information area is cleared (step Y726).

Next, the special figure 2 large winning opening opening information area is cleared (step Y727), the deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 2 area (step Y728), and the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step Y729). ). Then, the special figure 2 stop symbol save area is cleared (step Y730), the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (step Y731), and the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 is terminated. ..

By the above processing of FIGS. 56 to 61, when one special figure variation display game has a special result, the other special figure variation display game is forcibly stopped with a disengagement result. That is, based on the special figure 1 variable display game having a special result, the first end control process is performed in which the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped with a disengagement result, and the special figure 2 variable display game has a special result. Based on this, the second end control process is performed in which the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped as a result of disconnection.

From the above, the first variable display game execution control means (game control device 100) executes the second variable display game when the execution control of the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) is performed. When the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) whose execution control is performed by the control means (game control device 100) has a special result, the first variation display game that performs the execution control. Can be terminated as a result other than the special result, and the second variable display game execution control means is executed by the first variable display game execution control means when the execution control of the second variable display game is performed. When the first variable display game being controlled has a special result, the second variable display game performing the execution control can be terminated as a result other than the special result. As a result, when a special result is derived in one variable display game, the other variable display game can be forcibly stopped with the off result, so that a problem does not occur even when simultaneous fluctuations are performed. Can be.

[Processing during display of special figure 1]
62 and 63 show the process during display of the special figure 1 (step Y110) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process. In this special figure 1 display process, first, the small hit flag 1 set in the small hit flag 1 area in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step Y751), and the small hit flag 1 is loaded. Clear one area (step Y752).

Next, the jackpot flag 1 set in the jackpot flag 1 area is loaded (step Y753) in the jackpot flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, and the jackpot flag 1 area is cleared (step Y754). Then, the special figure 1 determines whether the jackpot is a jackpot, that is, whether the loaded jackpot flag 1 is jackpot information (step Y755), and if it is not a jackpot (step Y755; N), the process proceeds to step Y777. Further, in the case of a big hit (step Y755; Y), a test signal (for example, the condition device operating signal is turned on, the accessory continuous operating device is operated) regarding the start of the big hit (special figure 1 big hit) of the special figure 1 variation display game is turned on. The middle signal is turned on and the signal per special symbol is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y756).

After that, the round number upper limit value table is set (step Y759), the round number upper limit value (16, 8, 4 or 2 in the case of the present embodiment) corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired, and the round number upper limit value is acquired. Save to the area (step Y760). Further, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y761).

Next, the decorative special figure command corresponding to the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern is loaded and prepared from the hit symbol command area (step Y762), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y763). After that, the fanfare command is prepared (step Y764), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y765).

Next, the signal corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability of becoming a big hit in the special figure variation display game is saved in the external information output data area (step Y766). In the case of the present embodiment, in step Y766, two big hit signals and three big hit signals are saved as signals corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of probability. In addition, each ON / OFF is determined by the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability. For example, the jackpot 2 signal is turned ON when the jackpot type is a jackpot other than the 2R probability variation D1, and is ON when the jackpot type is the 2R probability variation D1 in the high probability state, and the 2R probability variation in the low probability state. When it is D1, it is turned off. Further, the jackpot 3 signals are turned ON when the jackpot type is a jackpot other than the 2R probability variation D1, and turned OFF when the jackpot type is the 2R probability variation D1 in the high probability state, and the 2R probability variation in the low probability state. When it is D1, it is turned ON.

After that, the jackpot fanfare time (for example, 5000 ms, 3000 ms or 4 ms) corresponding to the jackpot opening information is set (step Y767), and the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y768). .. Then, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit that opens the upper big winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) (step Y769).

If it is a big hit to open the upper prize opening (step Y769; Y), the upper prize opening fraudulent winning number area is cleared (step Y770), and the upper grand prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area is flagged outside the fraud monitoring period. Is saved (step Y771), and the process proceeds to step Y774. In addition, if it is not a big hit that opens the upper big winning opening (step Y769; N), that is, if it is a big hit that opens the lower big winning opening (second special variable winning device 39), the lower big winning opening illegal winning number area (Step Y772), the flag outside the fraudulent monitoring period is saved in the fraudulent monitoring period flag area of the lower prize-winning opening (step Y773), and the process proceeds to step Y774.

Next, 3 is set as the processing number (step Y774), and the game is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y775). Further, the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing (step Y776) is performed, and the special figure 1 display processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Y755, when the special figure 1 is not a big hit (step Y755; N), that is, when the big hit flag 1 is the missed information, it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 1 is the small hit (small hit information). (Step Y777). Then, when the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step Y777; Y), it is determined whether it is a high-probability final variation, that is, the last special figure variation display game in which the lottery is performed in the high-probability state. Determine (step Y778).

If it is not a high-probability final variation (step Y778; N), the process proceeds to step Y783. Further, in the case of a high probability final variation (step Y778; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y779), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y780). Then, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y781), and the left-handed instruction notification flag and the high-probability final fluctuation flag are cleared (step Y782). By clearing the left-handed instruction notification flag, the left-handed instruction notification command is set in the next special figure 1 normal processing, and the left-handed instruction notification is performed.

After that, a command is loaded from the hit symbol command area and prepared (step Y783), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y784). Further, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step Y785), an effect command setting process is performed (step Y786), and a signal related to a right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y790). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to be ON. Then, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y791). As a result, the first game status display unit 77 is turned on, and a display instructing a right-handed strike is made.

After that, it is determined whether it is a small hit that opens the upper large winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) (step Y792), and if it is a small hit that opens the upper large winning opening (step Y792; Y), The area of the number of illegal winnings of the upper prize opening is cleared (step Y793), the flag outside the illegal monitoring period is saved in the area of the flag area of the illegal monitoring period of the upper winning opening (step Y794), and the process proceeds to step Y797. In addition, if it is not a small hit that opens the upper large winning opening (step Y792; N), that is, if it is a small hit that opens the lower large winning opening (second special variable winning device 39), the lower large winning opening is illegally won. After clearing several areas (step Y795), saving the flag outside the fraudulent monitoring period in the lower prize winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y796), the process proceeds to step Y797. Then, the special figure 1 small hit fanfare middle process transition setting process (step Y797) is performed, and the special figure 1 display process is terminated.

Further, when it is determined in step Y777 that the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step Y777; N), it is a high-probability final variation, that is, the final special figure in which the lottery is performed in the high-probability state. It is determined whether the game is a variable display game (step Y798).

If it is not a high-probability final variation (step Y798; N), the process proceeds to step Y806. Further, in the case of a high probability final variation (step Y798; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y799), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y800). Then, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y801), and the left-handed instruction notification flag and the high-probability final fluctuation flag are cleared (step Y802).

Next, it is determined whether or not the small hit of the special figure 2 is in progress, that is, the second special game state based on the small hit generated in the special figure 2 variable display game is in progress (step Y803). If the small hit in FIG. 2 is in progress (step Y803; Y), the process proceeds to step Y806. As a result, the state of instructing right-handed strike is maintained. If the small hit in FIG. 2 is not in progress (step Y803; N), the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y804), and the game state display number 2 area is in the left-handed state. Save the number (step Y805). After that, the special figure 1 changing state in the special figure status area is cleared (information subtraction) (step Y806), the special figure 1 normal processing transition setting process 1 is performed (step Y807), and the special figure 1 display processing is terminated. ..

[Processing during display of special figure 2]
In FIGS. 64 and 65, the process during display of the special figure 2 (step Y141) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game process is shown. It should be noted that this special figure 2 display process is the same process as the special figure 1 display process described above for the special figure 2. In this special figure 2 display process, first, the small hit flag 2 set in the small hit flag 2 area in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is loaded (step Y811), and the small hit flag is loaded. Clear two areas (step Y812).

Next, the jackpot flag 2 set in the jackpot flag 2 area is loaded (step Y813) in the jackpot flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process, and the jackpot flag 2 region is cleared (step Y814). Then, the special figure 2 determines whether the jackpot is a jackpot, that is, whether the loaded jackpot flag 2 is jackpot information (step Y815), and if it is not a jackpot (step Y815; N), the process proceeds to step Y837. Further, in the case of a big hit (step Y815; Y), a test signal regarding the start of the big hit (special figure 2 big hit) of the special figure 2 variation display game (for example, the condition device operating signal is turned on, the accessory continuous operation device is operated). The middle signal is turned on and the signal per special symbol 2 is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y816).

After that, the round number upper limit value table is set (step Y819), the round number upper limit value (16, 8, 4 or 2 in the case of the present embodiment) corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired, and the round number upper limit value is acquired. Save to the area (step Y820). Further, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y821).

Next, the decorative special figure command corresponding to the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern is loaded from the hit symbol command area and prepared (step Y822), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y823). After that, the fanfare command is prepared (step Y824), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y825).

Next, the signal corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability of becoming a big hit in the special figure variation display game is saved in the external information output data area (step Y826). In the case of the present embodiment, in step Y826, two big hit signals and three big hit signals are saved as signals corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of probability. In addition, each ON / OFF is determined by the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability. For example, the jackpot 2 signal is turned ON when the jackpot type is a jackpot other than the 2R probability variation D1, and is ON when the jackpot type is the 2R probability variation D1 in the high probability state, and the 2R probability variation in the low probability state. When it is D1, it is turned off. Further, the jackpot 3 signals are turned ON when the jackpot type is a jackpot other than the 2R probability variation D1, and turned OFF when the jackpot type is the 2R probability variation D1 in the high probability state, and the 2R probability variation in the low probability state. When it is D1, it is turned ON.

After that, the jackpot fanfare time (for example, 5000 ms, 3000 ms or 4 ms) corresponding to the jackpot opening information is set (step Y827), and the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y828). .. Then, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit that opens the upper big winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) (step Y829).

If it is a big hit to open the upper prize opening (step Y829; Y), the upper prize entrance fraudulent winning number area is cleared (step Y830), and the upper grand prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area is flagged outside the fraud monitoring period. Is saved (step Y831), and the process proceeds to step Y834. In addition, if it is not a big hit that opens the upper big winning opening (step Y829; N), that is, if it is a big hit that opens the lower big winning opening (second special variable winning device 39), the lower big winning opening illegal winning number area (Step Y832), the flag outside the fraudulent monitoring period is saved in the fraudulent monitoring period flag area of the lower prize-winning opening (step Y833), and the process proceeds to step Y834.

Next, 3 is set as the processing number (step Y834), and the game is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y835). Further, the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing (step Y836) is performed, and the processing during display of special figure 2 is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Y815, if the special figure 2 is not a big hit (step Y815; N), that is, if the big hit flag 2 is the missed information, it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 2 is the small hit (small hit information). (Step Y837). Then, when the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step Y837; Y), it is determined whether it is the high-probability final variation, that is, the final special figure variation display game in which the lottery is performed in the high-probability state. Determine (step Y838).

If it is not a high-probability final variation (step Y838; N), the process proceeds to step Y843. Further, in the case of a high probability final variation (step Y838; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y839), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y840). Then, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y841), and the left-handed instruction notification flag and the high-probability final fluctuation flag are cleared (step Y842). By clearing the left-handed instruction notification flag, the left-handed instruction notification command is set in the next special figure 1 normal processing, and the left-handed instruction notification is performed.

After that, a command is loaded from the hit symbol command area to prepare (step Y843), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y844). Further, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step Y845), an effect command setting process is performed (step Y846), and a signal related to a right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y850). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to be ON. Then, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y851). As a result, the first game status display unit 77 is turned on, and a display instructing right-handed strike is made.

After that, it is determined whether it is a small hit that opens the upper large winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) (step Y852), and if it is a small hit that opens the upper large winning opening (step Y852; Y), The area of the number of illegal winnings of the upper prize opening is cleared (step Y853), the flag outside the illegal monitoring period is saved in the area of the flag area of the illegal monitoring period of the upper winning opening (step Y854), and the process proceeds to step Y857. In addition, if it is not a small hit that opens the upper large winning opening (step Y852; N), that is, if it is a small hit that opens the lower large winning opening (second special variable winning device 39), the lower large winning opening is illegally won. After clearing several areas (step Y855), saving the flag outside the fraudulent monitoring period in the lower prize winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y856), the process proceeds to step Y857. Then, the special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle process transition setting process (step Y857) is performed, and the special figure 2 display process is terminated.

Further, when it is determined in step Y837 that the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step Y837; N), it is a high-probability final variation, that is, the final special figure in which the lottery is performed in the high-probability state. It is determined whether the game is a variable display game (step Y858). If it is not a high-probability final variation (step Y858; N), the process proceeds to step Y866. Further, in the case of a high probability final variation (step Y858; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y859), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y860). Then, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y861), and the left-handed instruction notification flag and the high-probability final fluctuation flag are cleared (step Y862).

Next, it is determined whether or not the small hit of the special figure 1 is in progress, that is, the second special game state based on the small hit generated in the special figure 1 variable display game is in progress (step Y863). If the small hit in FIG. 1 is in progress (step Y863; Y), the process proceeds to step Y866. As a result, the state of instructing right-handed strike is maintained. If the small hit in FIG. 1 is not in progress (step Y863; N), the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y864), and the game state display number 2 area is in the left-handed state. Save the number (step Y865). After that, the special figure 2 in the special figure status area is cleared (information subtraction) (step Y866), the special figure 2 normal processing transition setting process 1 is performed (step Y867), and the special figure 2 display process is terminated. ..

That is, the game control device 100 generates a first special game state in which the special variable winning device is opened with the operation of the condition device based on the first special result of the variable display game. A second special game generating means for generating a second special gaming state in which the special variable winning device is opened without operating the condition device based on the second special result of the variable display game as well as the means. Eggplant.

[Fanfare / Interval processing Transition setting processing 1]
FIG. 66 describes the details of the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing (steps Y776, Y836) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 display processing and special drawing 2 display processing. In this fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing, first, the signal relating to the start of the big hit (first special game state) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y871). Here, one big hit signal output by a big hit or a small hit is set to ON. Next, the signal relating to the end of the high probability state and the time saving state (the state in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is shortened) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y872). Here, the special symbol 1 high-probability state signal is set to OFF, the special symbol 2 high-probability state signal is set to OFF, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal is set to OFF, and the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal is set to OFF.

After that, the number of rounds area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special game state is cleared (step Y873), the number in the low probability is saved in the game state display number area (step Y874), and the special figure game mode The special figure low probability flag is saved in the flag area (step Y875).

Then, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery, which saves the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step Y876), and the special figure variation display that can be executed in the high probability state. Clear the high-probability fluctuation frequency region for managing the number of games (step Y877). As a result, the high-probability state and the time-saving state are terminated, and the normal-probability state and the normal state are set.

Next, the jackpot information is saved in the special figure status area (step Y878), and the high-probability final fluctuation flag area is cleared (step Y879). Further, the signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y880), and the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y881). After that, the Fuzu low probability flag is saved in the Fuzu game mode flag area (step Y882), and the fanfare / interval processing transition setting process is terminated.

[Special figure 1 Small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting processing]
FIG. 67 shows a special figure 1 small hit fanfare middle process transition setting process (step Y797) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 display process. In this special figure 1 small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting process, first, "7" related to the small hit fanfare middle processing is set as the processing number (step Y891), and the processing number is set in the special figure 1 game processing number area. Save (step Y892).

Next, the small hit fanfare time (for example, 4 ms) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y893), and the signal relating to the start of the small hit is saved in the external information output data area (step Y894). Here, one big hit signal output by a big hit or a small hit is set to ON. Further, the signal relating to the start of the special figure 1 small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y895). Here, the special symbol 1 small hit signal is set to ON.

After that, the small hit medium information is saved in the special figure status information (step Y896), the small hit display pointer is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y897), and the special figure 1 small hit fanfare processing transition setting process is completed. To do.

[Special figure 2 Small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting processing]
FIG. 68 shows a special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle process transition setting process (step Y857) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 display process. In this special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting process, first, "7" related to the small hit fanfare middle processing is set as the processing number (step Y901), and the processing number is set in the special figure 2 game processing number area. Save (step Y902).

Next, the small hit fanfare time (for example, 4 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y903), and the signal relating to the start of the small hit is saved in the external information output data area (step Y904). Here, one big hit signal output by a big hit or a small hit is set to ON. Further, the signal relating to the start of the special figure 2 small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y905). Here, the special symbol 2 small hit signal is set to ON.

After that, the small hit medium information is saved in the special figure status information (step Y906), the small hit display pointer is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y907), and the special figure 2 small hit fanfare processing transition setting process is completed. To do.

[Fanfare / Processing during interval]
FIG. 69 shows the fanfare / interval processing (steps Y111, Y142) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing and special drawing 2 game processing. In this fanfare / interval processing, first, the number of rounds in the special game state is updated by +1 (step Y951), the large winning opening opening information and the round command corresponding to the number of rounds are prepared (step Y952), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step Y953).

Next, the jackpot processing control pointer initial value corresponding to the jackpot opening information and the number of rounds is set (step Y954), and the pointer initial value is saved in the jackpot processing control pointer area (step Y955). The initial value of the processing control pointer during the jackpot is set to 0 when opening and closing are repeated in one round. Here, the 5th R of the 16R probability variation F3 (special figure 2 upper prize opening opening / closing pattern 5) corresponds. Further, in the case of performing one continuous opening in one round, the jackpot operation end value of 21 is set. The initial value may be set to a value other than 0 according to the number of times of opening and closing in one round.

Then, the large winning opening opening information and the large winning opening opening time corresponding to the number of rounds are set (step Y956), and 4 is set as the processing number (step Y957). The opening time set here is, for example, 200 ms, 600 ms, 1600 ms, or 29000 ms.

Next, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit of special figure 1 (step Y958), and if it is a big hit of special figure 1 (step Y958; Y), the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y959). ), The opening time of the large winning opening is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y960). On the other hand, if it is not a big hit in Special Figure 1 (step Y958; N), the processing number is saved in the special drawing 2 game processing number area (step Y961), and the big winning opening opening time is saved in the special drawing 2 game processing timer area. (Step Y962).

Then, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit for opening the upper prize opening (first special variable prize device 38) (step Y963). Whether it is a big hit of the upper prize opening opening can be determined from the set big winning opening opening information. In the case of a big hit of opening the upper prize opening (step Y963; Y), the process transition setting process 1 during the opening of the big prize opening is performed (step Y964), and the fanfare / interval processing is completed. If it is not a big hit for opening the upper prize opening (step Y963; N), the process transition setting process 2 for opening the upper prize opening is performed (step Y965), and the fanfare / interval processing is completed.

[Processing while opening the big prize opening Transition setting process 1]
FIG. 70 shows the process transition setting process 1 (step Y964) during the opening of the large winning opening in the above-mentioned fanfare / interval process. In the process transition setting process 1 during the opening of the large winning opening, first, the signal relating to the opening start of the upper winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y971). Here, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is set to ON. Then, in order to open the opening / closing member 38c of the first special variable winning device 38, the upper winning opening on-data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y972), and the number of winnings to the large winning opening is counted. The number of large winning openings is cleared (step Y973), and the process transition setting process 1 during the opening of the large winning openings is completed.

[Processing while opening the big prize opening Transition setting process 2]
FIG. 71 shows the process transition setting process 2 (step Y965) during the opening of the large winning opening in the above-mentioned fanfare / interval process. In the process transition setting process 2 during the opening of the large winning opening, first, the signal relating to the opening start of the lower winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y981). Here, the special electric accessory 2 operating signal is set to ON. Then, in order to open the opening / closing member 39c of the second special variable winning device 39, the lower special winning opening on-data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y982), and the number of winnings to the large winning opening is counted. The number of large winning openings is cleared (step Y983), and the process transition setting process 2 during the opening of the large winning openings is completed.

[Processing while opening the big prize opening]
FIG. 72 shows the processing during opening of the large winning opening (steps Y112 and Y143) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing and special drawing 2 game processing. In this big winning opening opening processing, first, the big hit middle processing control pointer is loaded (step Y1001), and it is determined whether or not the loaded value is equal to or higher than the big hit operation end value (21 in this case) (step Y1002).

If the loaded value is not greater than or equal to the jackpot operation end value (21 in this case) (step Y1002; N), the jackpot operation transition setting process is performed (step Y1003), and the jackpot operation control pointer is updated by +1 (step Y1004). , The process is finished while the big winning opening is open. In this case, opening and closing is performed during one round, and the opening / closing mode of the special variable winning device is set according to the updated jackpot processing control pointer.

On the other hand, when the loaded value is equal to or higher than the jackpot operation end value (21 in this case) (step Y1002; Y), the current number of rounds in the executing special game state and the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit value region are used. To determine if the current round is the final round (step Y1005). If it is not the final round (step Y1005; N), an interval command related to the interval between rounds is prepared (step Y1006), and the effect command setting process (step Y1008) is performed. Further, in the case of the final round (step Y1005; Y), an ending command related to display control of the ending display screen at the end of the special game state is prepared (step Y1007), and an effect command setting process (step Y1008) is prepared. I do.

Next, the remaining ball processing time corresponding to the large winning opening opening information is set (step Y1009), and 5 related to the large winning opening remaining ball processing is set as the processing number (step Y1010). The remaining sphere processing time is set to 600 ms, 800 ms, or 1400 ms. Then, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit in Special Figure 1 (step Y1011).

In the case of a big hit in the special figure 1 (step Y1011; Y), the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y1012), and the remaining ball processing time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y1012). Step Y1013). On the other hand, if it is not a big hit in Special Figure 1 (step Y1011; N), the processing number is saved in the special drawing 2 game processing number area (step Y1014), and the remaining ball processing time is saved in the special drawing 2 game processing timer area. (Step Y1015).

After that, the off-data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1016), and the processing during the opening of the large winning opening is completed. In step Y1016, off-data is set for both the upper winning opening solenoid and the lower winning opening solenoid, and the closing process is performed for each of the winning openings.

[Big hit operation transition setting process]
FIG. 73 shows the jackpot operation transition setting process (step Y1004) in the above-mentioned process during opening of the jackpot. In this jackpot operation transition setting process, first, branch processing is performed depending on whether the value of the jackpot operation control pointer is an even number or an odd number (step Y1021). Here, it is assumed that 0 is an even number and the branch processing is performed.

If the value of the jackpot processing control pointer is even in step Y1021, the wait time corresponding to the control pointer is set (step Y1022). Here, 1500 ms is set as the wait time. Note that different wait times may be set depending on the value of the pointer. Next, the off-data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1023), and the process proceeds to step Y1026. In step Y1023, off-data is set for both the upper winning opening solenoid and the lower winning opening solenoid, and the closing process is performed for each of the winning openings.

On the other hand, when the value of the big hit processing control pointer is an odd number in step Y1021, the big winning opening opening time corresponding to the control pointer is set (step Y1024). Here, as the opening time of the big winning opening, 200 ms is set when the value of the processing control pointer during the big hit is 1 to 19, and 25000 ms is set when the value is 21. Next, the upper prize opening on-data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1025), and the process proceeds to step Y1026. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, only the upper prize opening (first special variable winning device 38) repeats opening and closing during one round, so in step Y1024, on-data is saved for the upper prize winning solenoid. doing. Of course, depending on the setting of the gaming machine, the lower large winning opening (second special variable winning device 39) may be able to be repeatedly opened and closed in one round.

After that, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is a big hit (step Y1026), and if it is a special figure 1 big hit (step Y1026; Y), the set time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y1026). Step Y1027), the jackpot operation transition setting process is completed. If it is not the big hit of the special figure 1 (step Y1026; N), the set time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1028), and the big hit operation transition setting process is ended. By the above processing, it is possible to repeatedly open and close the big winning opening in one round.

[Treatment of remaining balls in the winning opening]
FIG. 74 shows the large winning opening remaining ball processing (steps Y113, Y144) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing and special drawing 2 game processing. In this large winning opening remaining ball processing, first, it is determined whether the current round is the final round by comparing the current number of rounds in the running special game state with the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit value area. (Step Y1041).

Then, when the current round in the special gaming state is not the final round (step Y1041; N), the signal relating to the end of opening the large winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1042). Here, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is set to OFF, and the special electric accessory 2 operating signal is set to OFF. Next, the interval time corresponding to the large winning opening opening information and the number of rounds this time is set (step Y1043), and the fanfare / processing during the interval 3 is set as the processing number (step Y1044).

The interval period between rounds is the period from the end of the round to the elapse of the remaining ball processing time, and further from the elapse of the remaining ball processing time to the elapse of the interval time. For example, in the case of the special figure 1 upper prize opening opening / closing pattern 1, since the remaining ball processing time of 1400 ms and the interval time of 600 ms are set, the interval period is 2000 ms, and in this interval period, the interval effect is produced by the display device 41 or the like. Is executed.

On the other hand, when the current round in the special game state is the final round (step Y1041; Y), the jackpot end processing transition setting process is performed (step Y1045), and the ending time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step). Y1046), 6 related to the special figure 1 big hit end process or the special figure 2 big hit end process is set as the processing number (step Y1047).

Then, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit in Special Figure 1 (step Y1048). In the case of a big hit in the special figure 1 (step Y1048; Y), the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y1049), and the set time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step). Y1050), the processing of the remaining balls in the large winning opening is completed. On the other hand, if it is not a big hit in Special Figure 1 (step Y1048; N), the processing number is saved in the special drawing 2 game processing number area (step Y1051), and the set time is saved in the special drawing 2 game processing timer area (step Y1051). Step Y1052), the processing of the remaining balls in the large winning opening is completed.

The ending period from the end of the final round to the end of the special gaming state is the period from the end of the final round to the lapse of the remaining ball processing time and the lapse of the remaining ball processing time to the lapse of the ending time. For example, in the case of the special figure 1 upper prize opening opening / closing pattern 1, since the remaining ball processing time of 1400 ms and the ending time of 9600 ms are set, the ending period is 11000 ms, and in this ending period, the ending effect is produced by the display device 41 or the like. Is executed.

[Big hit end processing transition setting processing]
FIG. 75 shows the jackpot end processing transition setting processing (step Y1045) in the above-mentioned jackpot remaining ball processing. In this jackpot end processing transition setting process, first, a signal relating to the end of opening of the jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1071). Here, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is set to OFF, and the special electric accessory 2 operating signal is set to OFF.

Next, the information in the large winning opening count area for storing the number of winnings in the large winning opening is cleared (step Y1072), and the information in the round number area for storing the number of rounds in the special gaming state is cleared (step Y1073). ), Clear the information of the round number upper limit value area for storing the upper limit value of the number of rounds in the special game state (step Y1074).

Then, the information in the round number upper limit value information area for storing the flag for determining the upper limit value of the number of rounds is cleared (step Y1075), and the flag for storing the opening information determination for the large winning opening is stored in the large winning opening opening information area. The information is cleared (step Y1076), the information in the jackpot middle control pointer area for setting the opening / closing mode of the jackpot opening is cleared (step Y1077), and the jackpot end processing transition setting process is terminated.

[Special figure 1 jackpot end processing]
FIG. 76 shows the special figure 1 jackpot end process (step Y114) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process. In the special figure 1 jackpot end process, first, "0" is set as the process number related to the special figure 1 normal process (step Y1101), and the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y1102).

Next, the signal regarding the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1103). Here, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 3 signal are set to OFF. Then, the signal relating to the start of the high probability state and the time saving state (general power support state) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1104). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to ON. The big hit 2 signal is ON even during the special game state, and this is continued.

After that, the signal regarding the end of the jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1105). Here, the condition device operating signal, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, the special symbol 1 hit signal, and the special symbol 2 hit signal are set to OFF. Next, the signal relating to the start of the high probability state and the time saving state is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1106). Here, the special symbol 1 high-probability state signal, the special symbol 2 high-probability state signal, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal, and the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal are set to ON.

Then, the signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1107). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to ON. Next, the number with high probability is saved in the game state display number area (step Y1108). In addition, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, since the time is always shortened during the high probability, these are not distinguished and are referred to as the numbers during the high probability. After that, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1109), and the number turned off is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1110).

Next, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the upper prize winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1111), and the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1112). Clear the special figure status area (step Y1113). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status 0 indicates that neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed.

After that, the high probability flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1114), and the initial value (here, 50) is set in the high probability fluctuation number area for managing the number of executions of the special figure variation display game in the high probability state. ) Is saved (step Y1115). Further, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y1116), and the special figure 2 game wait time value (here, 8 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step). Y1117), the Fuzu high probability flag is saved in the Fuzu game mode flag area (step Y1118), and the special figure 1 jackpot end process is terminated.

By performing this special figure 1 jackpot end processing, it is possible to start the special figure variation display game for both special figure 1 and special figure 2, but in the timer interrupt processing, the special figure 2 game is performed after the special figure 1 game processing. In order to perform the processing, the processing to start the special figure variation display game is performed in the special figure 2 game processing by the timer interrupt that has performed the special figure 1 big hit end processing, and the special figure 2 variation display game is performed rather than the special figure 1 variation display game. Can be started earlier. Therefore, by saving the special figure 2 game wait time value in the special figure 2 game processing timer area in step Y1117, the start processing of the special figure 2 variable display game is delayed until the next timer interrupt processing, and the special figure 1 The variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are processed by the same timer interrupt. It should be noted that the special figure 2 variable display game may be started earlier by not setting the special figure 2 game wait time value.

That is, the second variable display game execution control means is the first until the game control device 100 can execute the process related to the start of the first variable display game after the end of the special game state. (2) A game processing standby means for preventing the processing related to the start of the variable display game from being in an executable state.

[Special figure 2 jackpot end processing]
FIG. 77 shows the special figure 2 big hit end process (step Y145) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game process. This special figure 2 big hit end process is the same process except that step Y1117 in the above special figure 1 big hit process is not performed.

First, "0" is set as the processing number related to the special figure 2 normal processing (step Y1121), and the processing number is saved in the special drawing 2 game processing number area (step Y1122). Next, the signal regarding the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1123). Here, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 3 signal are set to OFF. Then, the signal relating to the start of the high probability state and the time saving state (general power support state) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1124). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to ON. The big hit 2 signal is ON even during the special game state, and this is continued.

After that, the signal regarding the end of the jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1125). Here, the condition device operating signal, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, the special symbol 1 hit signal, and the special symbol 2 hit signal are set to OFF. Next, the signal relating to the start of the high probability state and the time saving state is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1126). Here, the special symbol 1 high-probability state signal, the special symbol 2 high-probability state signal, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal, and the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal are set to ON.

Then, the signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1127). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to ON. Next, the number with high probability is saved in the game state display number area (step Y1128). In addition, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, since the time is always shortened during the high probability, these are not distinguished and are referred to as the numbers during the high probability. After that, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1129), and the extinguished number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1130).

Next, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the upper prize winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1131), and the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1132). Clear the special figure status area (step Y1133). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status 0 indicates that neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed.

After that, the high probability flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1134), and the initial value (here, 50) is set in the high probability fluctuation number area for managing the number of executions of the special figure variation display game in the high probability state. ) Is saved (step Y1135). Further, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y1136), the normal figure high probability flag is saved in the normal figure game mode flag area (step Y1137), and the special figure 2 big hit ends. End the process.

By these special figure 1 big hit processing and special figure 2 big hit processing, a specific game state which is a high probability state and a time saving state is set until the special figure variation display game is executed 50 times after the end of the first special game state. It will be. That is, the game control device 100 can generate a specific game state in which the probability that the result of the variable display game becomes a special result is higher than that of the normal state for a predetermined period after the end of the special game state. Make. In addition, the specific game state generating means sets the probability that the result of the variable display game becomes the first special result for a predetermined period as the specific game state higher than the normal state.

[Small hit fanfare middle processing]
Next, the details of the small hit fanfare middle processing (steps Y115, Y146) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing and special drawing 2 game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 78, in this small hit fanfare middle process, first, branching is performed according to an open pattern (step Y1201).

If the opening pattern is small hit 1 (special figure 1 lower large winning opening opening / closing pattern 1) in step Y1201, prepare a small hit opening command for opening the lower large winning opening (second special variable winning device 39). (Step Y1202), the effect command setting process is performed (step Y1203). Next, 8 related to the small hit medium processing is set as the processing number (step Y1204), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y1205).

After that, the small hit opening time 1 (48 ms in this case) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y1206), and the signal relating to the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1207). Here, the special electric accessory 2 operating signal is set to ON. Then, the lower prize opening on-data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1208), and the process proceeds to step Y1230.

In addition, when the opening pattern is the small hit 2 (special figure 2 lower large winning opening opening / closing pattern 2) in step Y1201, the command during opening the small hit opening of the lower large winning opening (second special variable winning device 39) is issued. Prepare (step Y1209) and perform the effect command setting process (step Y1210). Next, 8 related to the small hit medium processing is set as the processing number (step Y1211), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1212).

After that, the small hit opening time 2 (here, 1600 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1213), and the signal relating to the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1214). Here, the special electric accessory 2 operating signal is set to ON. Then, the lower prize opening on-data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1215), and the process proceeds to step Y1230.

Further, in step Y1201, when the opening pattern is the small hit 3 (special figure 2 upper large winning opening opening / closing pattern 6), the small hit opening command for opening the upper large winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) is issued. Prepare (step Y1216) and perform the effect command setting process (step Y1217). Next, 8 related to the small hit medium processing is set as the processing number (step Y1218), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1219).

After that, the small hit opening time 3 (1200 ms in this case) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1220), and the signal relating to the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1221). Here, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is set to ON. Then, the upper prize opening on-data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1222), and the process proceeds to step Y1230.

Further, in step Y1201, when the opening pattern is the small hit 4 (special figure 2 upper large winning opening opening / closing pattern 7), the small hit opening command for opening the upper large winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) is issued. Prepare (step Y1223) and perform the effect command setting process (step Y1224). Next, 8 related to the small hit medium processing is set as the processing number (step Y1225), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1226).

After that, the small hit opening time 4 (here, 1600 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1227), and the signal relating to the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1228). Here, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is set to ON. Then, the upper prize opening on-data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1229), and the process proceeds to step Y1230. After performing the processing according to these small hit types, the large winning opening count number area for counting the number of winnings to the large winning opening is cleared (step Y1230), and the processing during the small hit fanfare is completed.

[Small hit medium processing]
FIG. 79 shows the small hit medium processing (steps Y116, Y147) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing and special drawing 2 game processing. In this small hit middle process, first, a small hit end screen command is prepared (step Y1241), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y1242). Next, branching is performed according to the open pattern (step Y1243).

In step Y1243, when the opening pattern is a small hit 1 (special figure 1 lower large winning opening opening / closing pattern 1), 9 related to the small hit remaining ball processing is set as the processing number (step Y1244), and special drawing 1 is set. The processing number is saved in the game processing number area (step Y1245). Then, the small hit remaining ball processing time 1 (600 ms in this case) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y1246), and the off data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1247). End the hit processing.

In step Y1243, when the opening pattern is a small hit 2 (special figure 2 lower large winning opening opening / closing pattern 2), 9 related to the small hit remaining ball processing is set as the processing number (step Y1248), and the special figure 2 The processing number is saved in the game processing number area (step Y1249). Then, the small hit remaining ball processing time 2 (600 ms in this case) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1250), and the off data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1251). End the hit processing.

In step Y1243, when the opening pattern is a small hit 3 or 4 (special figure 2 upper winning opening opening / closing pattern 6 or 7), 9 related to the small hit remaining ball processing is set as the processing number (step Y1252). , Special figure 2 The processing number is saved in the game processing number area (step Y1253). Then, the small hit remaining ball processing time 3 (800 ms in this case) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1254), and the off data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1255). End the hit processing.

In steps Y1247, Y1251 and Y1255, off-data is set for both the upper winning opening solenoid and the lower winning opening solenoid, and the closing process is performed for each of the winning openings.

[Small hit residual ball processing]
FIG. 80 shows the small hit remaining ball processing (steps Y117, Y148) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing and special drawing 2 game processing. In this small hit remaining ball processing, first, it is determined whether or not the small hit is a small hit in FIG. 1 (step Y1271). In the case of the small hit of the special figure 1 (step Y1271; Y), 10 related to the special figure 1 small hit end process is set as the processing number (step Y1272), and the processing number is set to the special figure 1 game processing number area. Save (step Y1273). Next, the small hit ending time (here, 100 ms) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y1274), and the process proceeds to step Y1278.

If it is not the small hit of the special figure 1 (step Y1271; N), 10 related to the special figure 2 small hit process is set as the processing number (step Y1275), and the processing number is set in the special figure 2 game processing number area. Save (step Y1276). Next, the small hit ending time (here, 100 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1277), and the process proceeds to step Y1278.

Then, the signal relating to the end of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1278). Here, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal and the special electric accessory 2 operating signal are set to OFF. Further, the large winning opening count area is cleared (step Y1279), and the small hit remaining ball processing is completed.

[Special figure 1 small hit end processing]
FIG. 81 shows the special figure 1 small hit end process (step Y118) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process. In this special figure 1 small hit end process, first, 0 related to the special figure 1 normal process is set as the process number (step Y1301), and the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y1302).

Next, the signal relating to the end of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1303). Here, the special symbol 1 small hit signal is set to OFF. Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the lower prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1304), the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1305), and the special figure status area is cleared (step Y1305). Y1306). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status 0 indicates that neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the probability is high (step Y1307), and if the probability is high (step Y1307; Y), the process proceeds to step Y1310. If the probability is not high (step Y1307; N), the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1308). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1309), and the special figure 2 game wait time value (here, 8 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1310). ), The special figure 1 small hit end process is completed. Here, too, by saving the special figure 2 game wait time value in the special figure 2 game processing timer area, the start processing of the special figure 2 variable display game is delayed until the next timer interrupt processing, and the special figure 1 variable display game. And special figure 2 The variable display game is processed by the same timer interrupt. It should be noted that the special figure 2 variable display game may be started earlier by not setting the special figure 2 game wait time value.

[Special figure 2 small hit end processing]
FIG. 82 shows the special figure 2 small hit end process (step Y149) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game process. In this special figure 2 small hit end process, first, 0 related to the special figure 2 normal process is set as the process number (step Y1331), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1332).

Next, the signal regarding the end of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1333). Here, the special symbol 2 small hit signal is set to OFF. Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the upper prize winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1334), and the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1335). After that, the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1336), and the special figure status area is cleared (step Y1337). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status 0 indicates that neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the probability is high (step Y1338), and if the probability is high (step Y1338; Y), the special figure 2 small hit end process is terminated. If the probability is not high (step Y1338; N), the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1339). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1340), and the special figure 2 small hit end process is completed.

[Design fluctuation control process]
FIG. 83 shows the symbol variation control processing (steps Y120, Y153) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process and special figure 2 game process. The symbol variation control process is a process of controlling the variation of the special symbol on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 and setting the display data of the special symbol. In this symbol variation control process, first, it is checked whether the variation control flag of the symbol to be controlled (special figure 1 or special figure 2) is changing (step Y1401).

Then, when the fluctuation control flag is fluctuating (step Y1402; Y), the symbol display table (for variation) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled is acquired (step Y1403), and the blinking control timer related to the symbol to be controlled is acquired. Is updated by -1 (step Y1404), and it is determined whether the value of the timer is 0, that is, whether the time is up (step Y1405).

If the value of the blinking control timer is not 0 (step Y1405; N), the process proceeds to step Y1408. When the value of the blinking control timer is 0 (step Y1405; Y), the initial value of the blinking control timer (here, 100 ms) is saved in the blinking control timer area to be controlled (step Y1406), and the symbol to be controlled is controlled. The variable symbol number according to the above is updated by +1 (step Y1407), and display data corresponding to the value of the target variable symbol number region is acquired (step Y1408). After that, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step Y1411), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the fluctuation control flag is not changing (step Y1402; N), the symbol display table (for stopping) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled is acquired (step Y1409). Then, the display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area of the control target is acquired (step Y1410), the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step Y1411), and the symbol variation control process is terminated. As a result, among the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, the special figure corresponding to the symbol number is displayed on the special figure display to be controlled.

[Segment LED editing process]
Next, the details of the segment LED editing process (step X112) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the segment LED editing process, the special figure 1 hold display 54, the special figure 2 hold display 55, the normal figure hold display 75, the first game state display unit 76, and the second game state display provided in the batch display device 50 are displayed. Settings related to driving of the segment LEDs constituting the unit 77 and the round display unit 60 are performed.

As shown in FIG. 84, in the segment LED editing process, first, the blinking control timer is updated by +1 (step X581), and it is determined whether the output is on timing depending on whether or not the specific bit of the blinking control timer is 1. (Step X582). In the present embodiment, when the bit 5 of the blinking control timer is 1, it is determined that the output is on timing, so that a blinking cycle of 128 ms is created.

When the output is on timing (step X582; Y), the normal figure hold number display table 1 of the normal figure hold number display tables 1 and 2 in which the display mode on the normal figure hold indicator is defined is set. (Step X583), when the output is not on timing (step X582; N), the normal figure hold number display table 2 is set (step X584). Then, the display data corresponding to the number of reserved normal figures is acquired from the set number of reserved normal figures display table, and the data is saved in the segment area of the reserved number of normal figures display (step X585). In the present embodiment, if the number of reserved figures is any one of "0" to "2", the display data will be the same regardless of which of the reserved numbers of ordinary figures display table is set.

Next, it is determined whether the output is on-timing (step X586), and if the output is on-timing (step X586; Y), the number of special figure 1 holdes in which the display mode on the special figure 1 hold indicator is defined. Of the display tables 1 and 2, the special figure 1 hold number display table 1 is set (step X587), and when the output is not on timing (step X586; N), the special figure 1 hold number display table 2 is set (step X587). Step X588). Then, the display data corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is acquired from the set special figure 1 hold number display table and saved in the segment area of the special figure 1 hold indicator (step X589).

After that, it is determined whether the output is on-timing (step X590), and if the output is on-timing (step X590; Y), the display mode of the special figure 2 hold indicator is defined. Of Tables 1 and 2, the special figure 2 hold number display table 1 is set (step X591), and when the output is not on timing (step X590; N), the special figure 2 hold number display table 2 is set (step). X592). Then, the display data corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is acquired from the set special figure 2 hold number display table and saved in the segment area of the special figure 2 hold indicator (step X593).

Further, a round display table in which the display mode on the round display unit is defined is set (step X594), display data corresponding to the round display LED pointer is acquired, and the display data is saved in the segment area of the round display unit (step X595). ).

Next, when the time saving state occurs, the game state display table 1 in which the display mode on the second game state display unit 58 that lights up to notify the occurrence of the time saving state is set (step X596) is set (step X596), and the game state display number is set. The display data corresponding to is acquired and saved in the segment area of the first game state display unit (step X597). In the present embodiment, the first game status display unit composed of one LED is configured to be turned off during normal operation and turned on during special drawing time reduction (during normal power support).

After that, the game state display table 2 in which the display mode on the second game state display unit for notifying that the right-handed is more advantageous than the left-handed is set (step X598) is set (step X598), and the game is played. The display data corresponding to the status display number 2 is acquired, saved in the segment area of the second game status display unit (step X599), and the segment LED editing process is completed. In the present embodiment, the second game status display unit composed of one LED is turned off at the time of normal hitting (left hitting), and at the time of right hitting (in the case of this embodiment, during big hit, during small hit, during normal electric support). ) Is configured to light up.

[Magnet fraud monitoring process]
FIG. 85 shows the magnet fraud monitoring process (step X113) in the timer interrupt process described above. In this magnet fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of an abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61, and the start and end of fraud notification are set.

In this magnet fraud monitoring process, first, the magnet sensor (magnetic sensor switch) is turned on from the state of the detection signal output from the magnetic sensor 61 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3), that is, abnormal magnetism is applied. It is determined whether or not it is in the detected state (step X611). When the magnet sensor is on (step X611; Y), that is, when abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer that measures the detection period of abnormal magnetism is updated by +1 to check whether the timer has timed up. Determine (step X613).

When the magnet fraud monitoring timer times out (step X613; Y), that is, when abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period of time, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step X614), and the initial value of the magnet fraud notification timer (step X614). Here, 60,000 ms) is saved in the magnet fraud notification timer area (step X615). Then, a magnet fraud notification command is prepared (step X616), a magnet fraud generation flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step X617), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value in the magnet fraud flag region. (Step X613). That is, when the magnetic sensor 61 is continuously turned on for a certain period of time (for example, eight interrupts), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

On the other hand, when the magnet sensor (magnetic sensor switch) is not on (step X611; N), that is, when abnormal magnetism is not detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step X618), and the magnet fraud notification time is set. If the specified magnet fraud notification timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step X619). The minimum value of the magnet fraud notification timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is 0 (step X620). Even when the magnet fraud monitoring timer has not timed up (step X613; N), the process proceeds to step X619.

Then, when the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is not 0 (step X620; N), that is, when the time is not up, the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is 0 (step X620; Y), that is, when the time has been up or the time has already been up, the fraudulent notification period has expired, or the fraudulent notification has been issued from the beginning. If not, prepare a command to end the magnet fraud notification (step X621). Further, a magnet fraud release flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step X622), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value in the magnet fraud flag region (step X623).

Then, when the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag region (step X623; Y), the magnet fraud monitoring process ends. If the values do not match (step X623; N), the prepared magnet fraud flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area (step X624), the effect command setting process is performed (step X625), and the magnet fraud monitoring process is completed. To do.

[Screen radio wave fraud monitoring process]
FIG. 86 shows the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process (step X114) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process. In the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of an abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 62, and the start and end of the fraudulent notification are set.

In this panel radio wave fraud monitoring process, first, the panel radio wave sensor 62 starts from the state of the detection signal output from the panel radio wave sensor 62 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3) via the proximity I / F 121. It is determined whether it is on, that is, it is in a state where an abnormal radio wave is detected (step X631). When the panel radio wave sensor is on (step X631; Y), that is, when an abnormal radio wave is detected, the initial value of the radio wave fraud notification timer (here, 60000 ms) is saved in the radio wave fraud notification timer area (step X632).

Then, a command for notifying the board radio wave is prepared (step X633), a board radio wave fraud occurrence flag is prepared as a board radio wave fraud flag (step X634), and the prepared board radio wave fraud flag is set to the value of the board radio wave fraud flag area. It is determined whether they match (step X639). That is, in the case of radio wave fraud, unlike the case of magnetic fraud, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when an abnormal radio wave is detected.

On the other hand, when the panel radio wave sensor is not on (step X631; N), that is, when an abnormal radio wave is not detected, the radio wave fraud notification timer that defines the radio wave fraud notification time is not 0, and the radio wave fraud notification timer is updated by -1. Step X635). The minimum value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is 0 (step X636).

If the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is not 0 (step X636; N), that is, if the time is not up, the board radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is 0 (step X636; Y), that is, when the time is up or the time has already been up, the fraudulent notification period has expired, or the fraudulent notification has been issued from the beginning. If this is not done, prepare a command to end the board radio wave fraud notification (step X637), prepare a board radio wave fraud release flag as a board radio wave fraud flag (step X638), and set the prepared board radio wave fraud flag to the board radio wave. It is determined whether or not the value matches the value of the invalid flag area (step X639).

Then, when the prepared board radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the board radio wave fraud flag area (step X639; Y), the board radio wave fraud monitoring process ends. If the values do not match (step X639; N), the prepared board radio wave fraud flag is saved in the board radio wave fraud flag area (step X640), the effect command setting process is performed (step X641), and the board radio wave fraud monitoring is performed. End the process.

[External information editing process]
FIG. 87 shows the external information editing process (step X115) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process. In the external information editing process, the monitoring results of the payout command transmission process (step X105), the winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step X108), the magnet fraud monitoring process (step X113), the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process (step X114), etc. Based on the above, information to be output to an external device such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device or a test firing test device is created and set in an output buffer.

In this external information editing process, first, it is determined whether a glass frame opening error is occurring (step X701), and if a glass frame opening error is not occurring (step X701; N), the main body frame (front frame 12) is being generated. ) Determine if an open error is occurring (step X702). Then, when the main body frame opening error is not occurring (step X702; N), the off data of the door / frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (step X703), and the off data of the security signal is saved as external information. It is saved in the output data area (step X704), and the process proceeds to step X707.

On the other hand, when a glass frame opening error is occurring (step X701; Y) or when a main body frame (front frame 12) opening error is occurring (step X702; Y), the door / frame opening signal is transmitted. The on-data is saved in the external information output data area (step X705), the on-data of the game machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step X706), and the process proceeds to step X707. That is, the information that the glass frame 14 and the front frame 12 are open is output as external information.

Next, if the security signal control timer that measures a predetermined time (for example, 256 ms) from the time when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch or the like is not 0, the security signal control timer is updated by -1 (step X707). ). The minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to 0.

Then, when the value of the security signal control timer is not 0 (step X708; N), that is, when the time is not up, the on-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step X710), and in step X711. Transition. As a result, it is output as external information that the data stored in the RAM has been initialized. When the value of the security signal control timer is 0 (step X708; Y), is the frame radio wave fraud occurring, which is to detect an abnormal radio wave by the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12. Is determined (step X709).

When the frame radio wave fraud is occurring (step X709; Y), the on-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step X710), and the process proceeds to step X711. Further, when the frame radio wave fraud is not occurring (step X709; N), it is determined whether a switch abnormality error such as a switch connector disconnection is occurring (step X711). Then, when the switch abnormality error is not occurring (step X711; N), the process proceeds to step X713. When a switch abnormality error is occurring (step X711; Y), the on-data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step X712), and the process proceeds to step X713.

Then, if at least one of the magnet fraud is occurring (step X713; Y), the board radio wave fraud is occurring (step X714; Y), and the grand prize opening fraud is occurring (step X715; Y), the security signal is sent. The on-data is saved in the external information output data area (step X718), the on-data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step X719), and the process proceeds to step X720. That is, the occurrence of the error is output as external information. If any of the errors in steps X713 to X715 has not occurred, the off-data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step X717), and the process proceeds to step X720.

Then, the start port 1 signal editing process (step X720) for editing the winning signal to the first starting winning opening 36, the starting port 2 signal editing process (step X721) for editing the winning signal to the normal variable winning device 37, the first. 2 Start port 3 Signal editing process (step X722) for editing the winning signal to the start winning port 97 is performed. Next, the main prize ball signal editing process (step X723) for setting the information regarding the number of prize balls to be paid out is performed, and the symbol fixed number signal editing process for setting the information related to the number of executions of the special figure variation display game is performed. (Step X724), the external information editing process is terminated.

[Starting port 1 signal editing process]
FIG. 88 shows the start port 1 signal editing process (step X720) in the above-mentioned external information editing process. In this start port 1 signal editing process, first, if the start port 1 signal output control timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step X731). The minimum value of the start port 1 signal output control timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the start port 1 signal output control timer is 0 (step X732). When the value of the start port 1 signal output control timer is 0 (step X732; Y), it is determined whether the number of start port 1 signal outputs is 0 (step X733).

When the number of times of starting port 1 signal output is not 0 (step X733; N), the number of times of starting port 1 signal output is updated by -1 (step X734), and the number of times of starting port 1 signal output is output to the starting port 1 signal output control timer area. The initial value of the control timer is saved (step X735). The initial value of the start port 1 signal output control timer is the sum of the on state (for example, high level) time (for example, 128 ms) and the off state (for example, low level) time (for example, 64 ms) of the start port signal. (For example, 192 ms). After that, the on-data that turns on the start port 1 signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step X737), and the start port 1 signal editing process is completed. When the number of start port 1 signal outputs is 0 (step X733; Y), the off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step X738). ), The start port 1 signal editing process is completed.

On the other hand, when the value of the start port 1 signal output control timer is not 0 (step X732; N), it is determined whether the start port 1 signal output control timer is in the output on section (step X736). The fact that the start port 1 signal output control timer is in the output on section means that the value of the start port 1 signal output control timer is a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms) or more. When the start port 1 signal output control timer is in the output on section (step X736; Y), the process shifts to step X737. When the start port 1 signal output control timer is not in the output on section (step X736; N), the off data for turning off the start port 1 signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step X738), the start port 1 signal editing process is completed. The start port 2 signal editing process (step X721) and the start port 3 signal editing process (step X722) in the above-mentioned external information editing process perform the same processing as the start port 1 signal editing process for the start port 2 signal and the start port. Perform for 3 signals.

[Main prize ball signal editing process]
FIG. 89 shows the main prize ball signal editing process (step X723) in the above-mentioned external information editing process. The main prize ball signal editing process outputs the main prize ball signal generated every time the number of prize balls (planned payout number) generated by winning a prize in the winning opening reaches a predetermined number (10 in this case) to an external device. It is a process.

In this main prize ball signal editing process, first, if the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step X741). The minimum value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (step X742). When the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (step X742; Y), it is determined whether the number of times of main prize ball signal output is 0 (step X743).

When the number of main prize ball signal outputs is not 0 (step X743; N), the number of times of main prize ball signal output is updated by -1 (step X744), and the main prize ball signal is output to the main prize ball signal output control timer area. The initial value of the control timer is saved (step X745). The initial value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is the sum of the on state (for example, high level) time (for example, 128 ms) and the off state (for example, low level) time (for example, 64 ms) of the main prize ball signal. It is the time (for example, 192 ms). After that, the on-data that turns on the main prize ball signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step X747), and the main prize ball signal editing process is completed. When the number of times the main prize ball signal is output is 0 (step X743; Y), the off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step). X748), the main prize ball signal editing process is completed.

On the other hand, when the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0 (step X742; N), it is determined whether the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on section (step X746). The fact that the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on section means that the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms) or more. When the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on section (step X746; Y), the process shifts to step X747. When the main prize ball signal output control timer is not in the output on section (step X746; N), the off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step X748), the main prize ball signal editing process is completed.

[Symbol confirmation count signal editing process]
FIG. 90 shows the symbol determination number signal editing process (step X724) in the above-mentioned external information editing process. The symbol fixed number signal editing process is a process for controlling the output time of information related to the number of times the special figure variation display game is executed.

In this symbol confirmation count signal editing process, first, if the symbol confirmation count signal output control timer is not 0, the symbol is updated by -1 (step X751). The minimum value of the symbol fixed number signal output control timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the symbol fixed number signal output control timer is 0 (step X752). When the value of the symbol confirmation count signal output control timer is 0 (step X752; Y), it is determined whether the symbol confirmation count signal output count, which is updated by +1 each time the special symbol variation display game ends, is 0. (Step X753).

When the number of symbol confirmation number signal output is not 0 (step X753; N), the number of symbol confirmation number signal output is updated by -1 (step X754), and the main prize ball signal is output to the symbol confirmation number signal output control timer area. The initial value of the control timer is saved (step X755). The initial value of the symbol confirmation count signal output control timer is obtained by adding the time (here, 256 ms) of the symbol confirmation count signal in the on state (for example, high level) and the time (here, 300 ms) in the off state (for example, low level). The time (here, 556 ms) is set. Since the gaming machine of the present embodiment can simultaneously execute the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, the on-state time is set to 256 ms and the off-state time is set to 300 ms.

After that, the on-data that turns on the symbol confirmation count signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step X7547), and the symbol confirmation count signal editing process is completed. When the symbol confirmation count signal output count is 0 (step X753; Y), the off data for turning off the symbol confirmation count signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step). X758), the symbol determination number signal editing process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the value of the symbol confirmation count signal output control timer is not 0 (step X752; N), it is determined whether the symbol confirmation count signal output control timer is in the output on section (step X756). The fact that the symbol confirmation count signal output control timer is in the output on section means that the value of the symbol confirmation count signal output control timer is a predetermined time (for example, 300 ms) or more. When the symbol fixed number signal output control timer is in the output on section (step X756; Y), the process shifts to step X757. When the symbol confirmation count signal output control timer is not in the output on section (step X756; N), the off data for turning off the symbol confirmation count signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step X748), the symbol determination number signal editing process is completed.

Next, the effect of the display device 41 will be described. As shown in FIG. 91 (a), in the center of the display area of the display device 41, a decorative special figure variable display game display unit 85 for displaying the decorative special figure variable display game set as the main display symbol is provided. The decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85 displays the decorative special figure variation display game by displaying the identification information in a variable display in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas and then stopping and displaying the display.

The decorative special figure variable display game includes a decorative special figure 1 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game and a decorative special figure 2 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game. In the effect control device 300, one of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is set as the main display symbol, and the other is set as the sub display symbol. Whether the main display symbol is set to the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 can be set by the effect control device 300 according to the state of the game, or by the operation of the effect button 25 by the player or the like. ..

In the upper left portion of the display area, a second decorative game display unit 88 for displaying the decorative special figure variable display game set as the sub display symbol is provided. The second decorative game display unit 88 includes a special figure 1 second decorative game display unit 88a for displaying the decorative special figure 1 variable display game, and a special figure 2 second decorative game for displaying the decorative special figure 2 variable display game. A display unit 88b is provided so that it is possible to determine which special figure is set as the sub-display symbol depending on the display position. The second decorative game displayed on each of the special figure 1 second decorative game display unit 88a and the special figure 2 second decorative game display unit 88b of the second decorative game display unit 88 is a decorative special figure variable display game display unit. Similar to 85, the identification information is variablely displayed in each of the left area, the middle area, and the right area, and then stopped and the result is displayed.

In FIG. 91 (a), for the sake of explanation, the decorative special figure variation display game is displayed on both the special figure 1 second decorative game display unit 88a and the special figure 2 second decorative game display unit 88b. However, in reality, the display unit is supported only by the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure (special figure 2 in FIG. 91 (b)) set as the sub display symbol as shown in FIG. 91 (b). Is displayed in. Of course, as shown in FIG. 91 (a), the decorative special figure variation display game of both special figures may always be displayed. Further, the arrangement of the special figure 1 second decorative game display unit 88a and the special drawing 2 second decorative game display unit 88b is not limited to the arrangement shown here, and may be any different position in the display area. Further, in the second decorative game display unit 88, the special figure 1 second decorative game display unit 88a and the special figure 2 second decorative game display unit 88b are different display units, but the decorative special figure 1 is changed to one display unit. Display game and decorative special figure 2 Of the variable display games, the decorative special figure variable display game set as the sub-display symbol may be displayed.

Further, with respect to the decorative special figure variable display game display unit 85, the display unit for displaying the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the display unit for displaying the decorative special figure 2 variable display game may be different display units. good. Further, the decorative special figure variable display game display unit 85 and the second decorative game display unit 88 do not make it possible to distinguish between special figure 1 and special figure 2 by the position of the display unit, but rather feature the color and shape of the identification information. It may be possible to distinguish by making the difference between FIG. 1 and FIG. Further, the information indicating which of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may be displayed may be displayed, or the information may be discriminated by the sound of the background, the lamp, the BGM, or the like.

Further, a storage display unit 83 for displaying the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory is provided in the lower center of the display area. The storage display unit 83 is provided with a first storage display unit 83a for displaying the first start memory and a second storage display unit 83b for displaying the second start memory. The decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the first memory display unit 83a has a one-to-one correspondence with the first start memory and is displayed side by side in the memory order. Here, there are three first start memories. It is shown that. The decorative special figure start memory display at the left end is the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory stored first, and shifts to the left each time it is digested.

In addition, it is possible to suggest the result of the special figure 1 variation display game corresponding to each start memory and the look-ahead result such as the variation pattern by the display mode. In addition, in FIG. 91A, a look-ahead effect for changing the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display is performed for the first start memory having the first digestion order. Further, the second storage display unit 83b displays the decorative special figure start storage display corresponding to the second start memory on a one-to-one basis, similarly to the first storage display unit 83a. Here, it is shown that there are three second start memories.

To the left of the first storage display unit 83a, a first execution storage display unit 84a forming an execution storage display unit 84 that displays information related to the start memory corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game currently being executed is provided. Has been done. At the start of the special figure 1 variable display game, the decorative special figure start memory display at the left end of the first memory display unit 83a is transferred to the first running memory display unit 84a, and the special figure 1 variable display game is executed. The results and fluctuation patterns of the above are suggested by the display mode.

To the left of the second storage display unit 83b, a second execution storage display unit 84b forming an execution storage display unit 84 that displays information related to the start memory corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game currently being executed is provided. Has been done. At the start of the special figure 2 variable display game, the decorative special figure start memory display at the left end of the second memory display unit 83b is transferred to the second running memory display unit 84b, and the special figure 2 variable display game is executed. The results and fluctuation patterns of the above are suggested by the display mode.

A start memory number display unit 86 for displaying the start memory number is provided in the upper right portion of the display area. The start memory number display unit 86 is provided with a first start memory number display unit 86a for displaying the number of first start memories and a second start memory number display unit 86b for displaying the number of second start memories. ing.

FIGS. 91 (b) to 91 (h) show an example of the display when the special figure variation display game is being executed. When the first start memory is digested and decreased from the state shown in FIG. 91 (a), the decorative special figure start memory display at the left end of the first memory display unit 83a is being executed for the first time as shown in FIG. 91 (b). The display that flows into the storage display unit 84a is performed. Here, the result of the special figure variation display game, the variation pattern, and the like are suggested in the first execution storage display unit 84a in the same manner as the look-ahead effect. Further, in the start storage number display unit 86, the numerical value of the first start storage number display unit 86a is reduced by one. Further, here, the special figure 1 is set as the main display symbol, and the decorative special figure variable display game display unit 85 has a decorative special figure 1 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game based on the first start memory. It is started, and the variable display of the identification information is started in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas.

When the second start memory is digested and decreased from the state shown in FIG. 91 (a), the decorative special figure start memory display at the left end of the second memory display unit 83b becomes the second as shown in FIG. 91 (b). The display that flows into the running storage display unit 84b is performed. Here, the result of the special figure variation display game, the variation pattern, and the like are not suggested in the second execution storage display unit 84b. Further, in the start storage number display unit 86, the numerical value of the second start storage number display unit 86b is reduced by one. Further, here, the special figure 2 is set as a sub display symbol, and in the second decorative game display unit 88, the decorative special figure variable display game is displayed only on the special figure 2 second decorative game display unit 88b, and this special figure is displayed. 2 The special figure 2 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game based on the second start memory is started on the second decorative game display unit 88b, and the identification information is displayed in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas. The variable display is started.

As shown in FIG. 91 (c), in the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85, the identification information is temporarily stopped in the left variation display area. In the temporarily stopped state, the identification information is displayed in a swaying manner, indicating that the information is not completely stopped. Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (d), the identification information is temporarily stopped in the right fluctuation display area. Here, the same identification information is stopped in the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area, and the reach effect is started. Of course, there are cases where different identification information stops in the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area, and the reach state is not reached. In this way, the first half fluctuation is until the right fluctuation display area is temporarily stopped in the reach state, and the second half fluctuation is thereafter.

Then, as shown in FIG. 91 (e), the identification information is temporarily stopped in the medium variation display area, and the identification information is temporarily stopped in all the variation display areas of the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85. It should be noted that the temporarily stopped state is the same as during the variable display, and here, the variable display is still in progress. After that, when the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game ends, the identification information of the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85 is stopped as shown in FIG. 91 (f), and the result mode is displayed.

Further, the decorative special figure 1 variable display game ends with the end of the stop time of the special figure 1 variable display game. Along with this, as shown in FIG. 91 (g), the display of the first execution storage display unit 84a is erased, and the next decorative special figure 1 variable display game can be started. Then, as shown in FIG. 91 (h), the special figure 1 variable display game is started based on the new first start memory, and the corresponding decorative special figure 1 variable display game is started in the decorative special figure variable display game display unit 85. Will be done.

Further, the second decorative game display unit 88 also executes the decorative special figure variable display game in the same manner as the decorative special figure variable display game display unit 85, and as shown in FIG. 91 (c), first the left The identification information is temporarily stopped in the area, and the identification information is temporarily stopped in the right area as shown in FIG. 91 (d). In the temporarily stopped state, the identification information is displayed in a swaying manner, indicating that the information is not completely stopped.

After that, the middle area is temporarily stopped, and the identification information is temporarily stopped in all the variable display areas of the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85. The temporarily stopped state is the same as during the variable display. After that, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variation display game ends, the identification information of the decoration second decoration game display unit 88 is stopped as shown in FIG. 91 (e), and the result mode is displayed.

Further, the decorative special figure 2 variable display game ends with the end of the stop time of the special figure 2 variable display game. Along with this, as shown in FIG. 91 (f), the display of the second executing storage display unit 84b is erased, and the next decorative special figure 2 variable display game can be started. Then, as shown in FIG. 91 (g), the special figure 2 variable display game is started based on the new second start memory, and the corresponding decorative special figure 2 variable display game is started in the second decorative game display unit 88. .. The same applies when the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is displayed on the special figure 1 second decorative game display unit 88a.

Since the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed independently and simultaneously, the corresponding decorative special figure variable display game is also executed independently and simultaneously. Then, if the result of one special figure variation display game is a special result (big hit or small hit), the other special figure variation display game is forcibly ended with a loss result and becomes a special game state. In this case, the decorative special figure variation display game is also forcibly stopped, and the result of the special figure variation display game corresponding to the main display symbol in the state of FIG. 91 (f) is a special result (big hit or small hit). If so, the special result is displayed on the decoration special figure variation display game display unit 85, and the decoration special figure variation display game on the second decoration game display unit 88 corresponding to the sub-display symbol ends with an off result.

Further, if the result of the special figure variation display game corresponding to the sub-display symbol in the state of FIG. 91 (e) is a special result (big hit or small hit), the special result is displayed on the second decorative game display unit 88, and the main result is displayed. The decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the display symbol The decoration special figure variation display game on the display unit 85 ends with an off result. In this case, the main display symbol and the sub display symbol are exchanged after the end of the special symbol variation display game corresponding to the sub display symbol, and the special result displayed on the second decorative game display unit 88 is the decorative special symbol variation display game. After being displayed on the display unit 85, the special game state is set. As a result, it is made clear to the player that the special result has been derived. Further, in this case, a skip effect may be performed as described with reference to FIG. 93.

Further, if there is no start memory corresponding to the sub display symbol in the state of FIG. 91 (f), the special figure variation display game corresponding to the sub display symbol is not executed, and the second decorative game is displayed until a new start memory is generated. The unit 88 remains in the state of displaying the result. Similarly, if there is no start memory corresponding to the main display symbol in the state of FIG. 91 (g), the special figure variation display game corresponding to the main display symbol is not executed. In this case, if the special figure variation display game corresponding to the sub display symbol is being executed, the main display symbol and the sub display symbol are exchanged.

As a result, the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the second decorative game display unit 88 is displayed on the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85. Further, the second decorative game display unit 88 is in a state of displaying the result displayed on the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85 corresponding to the special figure changed to the sub display symbol. That is, in a situation where only one special figure variation display game is executed, the executed special figure variation display game is set to be the main display symbol. Of course, without making such a change, the decorative special figure variation display game may be executed only by the decorative game display unit 88. Further, in the state of FIG. 91 (g), if there is no start memory corresponding to the main display symbol and the special figure variation display game corresponding to the sub display symbol is not executed, the customer waiting state is set.

Further, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the main display symbol and the sub display symbol can be exchanged by pressing the effect button 25. FIG. 92 shows an example of the display on the display device 41 when the main display symbol is changed based on the operation of the effect button 25 by the player.

FIG. 92A shows a state in which the special figure 1 is the main display symbol and the special figure 2 is the sub display symbol, and the special figure variation display game is executed in both the main display symbol and the sub display symbol. .. In the second decorative game display unit 88, the decorative special figure variation display game is displayed only on the special figure 2 second decorative game display unit 88b.

When the player presses the effect button 25 in this state, the main display symbol and the sub display symbol are switched. Along with this, as shown in FIG. 92B, the display of the decorative special figure variable display game display unit 85 moves to the second decorative game display unit 88, and the display of the second decorative game display unit 88 is displayed as a decorative special figure. The effect of moving to the variable display game display unit 85 is performed, and the displays are exchanged with each other as shown in FIG. 92 (c). In this case, since the special figure 1 becomes the sub display symbol, the display of the decorative special figure variable display game display unit 85 moves to the special figure 1 second decorative game display unit 88a. Further, since the special figure 2 is the main display symbol, the display of the special figure 2 second decorative game display unit 88b is moved to the decorative special figure variable display game display unit 85, and the special figure 2 second decorative game display unit 88b is decorated. The special figure fluctuation display game is not displayed.

Further, in FIG. 92 (d), the special figure 1 is the main display symbol and the special figure 2 is the sub display symbol, and the special figure variation display game is executed in both the main display symbol and the sub display symbol. It is a state, and the state in which the reach effect is performed in the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is shown. When the effect button 25 is operated during the reach effect in this state, the display of the decorative special figure variable display game display unit 85 and the display of the second decorative game display unit 88 are displayed as shown in FIG. 92 (e). Are replaced, and as shown in FIG. 92 (f), the reach effect is not displayed.

After that, when the effect button 25 is operated again, the display of the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85 and the display of the second decorative game display unit 88 are switched as shown in FIG. 92 (g). In this case, since the special figure 2 becomes the sub display symbol, the display of the decorative special figure variable display game display unit 85 moves to the special figure 2 second decorative game display unit 88b. Further, since the special figure 1 is the main display symbol, the display of the special figure 1 second decorative game display unit 88a is moved to the decorative special figure variable display game display unit 85, and the special figure 1 second decorative game display unit 88a is decorated. The special figure fluctuation display game is not displayed. Further, along with this change, the reach effect is resumed as shown in FIG. 92 (h). In this case, the reach effect is not restarted from the time of interruption in FIG. 92 (e), but is restarted from the time corresponding to the progress of the special figure variation display game changed to the main display symbol.

When the reach effect is performed and the decorative special figure variable display game display unit 85 is reduced and displayed as shown in FIG. 92 (d), the corresponding special figure display unit in the second decorative game display unit 88 The decorative special figure variation display game may be displayed. For example, in the case of FIG. 92 (d), since the main display symbol is the special figure 1, the special figure variation display game is displayed on the special figure 1 second decoration game display unit 88a instead of the decoration special figure variation display game display unit 85. You may display it.

Further, when the right region is stopped on the second decorative game display unit 88, the same identification information is stopped in the left region and the right region to enter the reach state, as shown in FIG. 92 (f). The display will continue, but the reach effect will not be displayed. In this state, when the special symbol, which is the sub-display symbol, is changed to the main display symbol, the corresponding reach effect is performed from the time of the change as shown in FIG. 92 (h).

In this way, by making it possible to switch the main display symbol and the sub display symbol at the player's will, the display can be made according to the player's preference, and the interest of the game can be improved.

FIG. 93 shows an example of the skip effect. The skip effect is an effect that makes the special figure variation display game appear as if it has ended based on the operation of the effect button 25. As described above, if one of the special figure variable display games ends with a special result while the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are being executed, the other special figure variable display game is forced. It is designed to end with an off-target result. When such a forced stop is performed, a skip effect is performed to make the player appear as if the forced stop was performed by the operation of the player, thereby improving the interest of the game.

The state shown in FIG. 93 (a) is a state in which both the main display symbol and the sub display symbol are executing the special symbol variation display game, and the sub display symbol ends before the main display symbol. The result of the sub-display symbol is a special result. Here, the special figure 1 is the main display symbol and the special figure 2 is the sub display symbol, but the reverse is also possible. In this state, when the remaining fluctuation time of the sub-display symbol reaches a predetermined time, the skip effect is started. As shown in FIG. 93B, in the skip effect, an instruction display 94 for instructing the pressing of the effect button 25 is performed, and a change in the remaining time of the period (specific period) in which the effect button 25 can be operated is visually displayed. The operation period display 93, which is a time bar in which the portion displayed in a specific color decreases with the passage of time, is performed.

Then, when the effect button 25 is pressed, the main display symbol and the sub display symbol are exchanged, and as shown in FIG. 93 (c), the identification information of the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85 is temporarily stopped. It becomes. That is, in FIG. 93 (b), the decoration feature displayed on the second decoration game display unit 88 (here, the special figure 2 second decoration game display unit 88b) corresponding to the special figure variation display game which is the sub display symbol. In FIG. 93 (c), the figure variation display game becomes a decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the main display symbol, is displayed on the decoration special figure variation display game display unit 85, and is temporarily stopped in a special result mode. ..

As a result, it is possible to make it appear as if the special figure variation display game has ended based on the operation of the effect button 25. When the display of the decorative special figure variable display game display unit 85 and the display of the second decorative game display unit 88 are exchanged, the effect of showing the state of movement as shown in FIG. 92 is not performed, so that FIG. 93 ( In b), it is possible to make it appear as if the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85 has stopped in the middle.

At the time of FIG. 93 (c), since the fluctuation time of the special figure variation display game, which is a special result, has not ended, the identification information of the decoration special figure variation display game display unit 85 is temporarily stopped, and the sub-display symbol is used. Since the special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure has not been forcibly stopped yet, the variable display is continued on the second decorative game display unit 88 (here, the special figure 1 second decorative game display unit 88a). ..

After that, when the variation time of the special figure variation display game, which is a special result, ends, the identification information of the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85 stops as shown in FIG. 93 (d). Along with this, the other special figure variation display game is forcibly stopped with the disengagement result, so that the second decorative game display unit 88 displays the disengagement result and stops. After this, it becomes a special game state.

FIGS. 93 (e) to 93 (h) show the case where the effect button 25 is not pressed in the skip effect. The skip effect ends before the end of the fluctuation time of the special figure variation display game, which is a special result, and with the end of this skip effect, the instruction display 94 and the instruction display 94 as shown in FIG. 93 (e) The operation period display 93 ends, and the state in which the variable display is displayed is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 93 (f), the decorative special figure changes corresponding to the special figure change display game of the main display symbol by the end of the change time of the special figure change display game of the sub display symbol which is a special result. Display game The decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display unit 85 is stopped with the result of being missed. At this time, in the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85, the identification information is stopped in the order of the left variation display area, the right variation display area, and the middle variation display area in the same manner as when displaying the normal deviation result, and the identification information is removed from the beginning. Stop as if it was planned to stop as a result. Actually, the special symbol variation display game of the main display symbol is forcibly stopped due to the disengagement result due to the end of the fluctuation time of the special symbol variation display game of the sub display symbol which is a special result, but the forced stop is clarified. I try to stop it so as not to show it.

After that, at the stop time of the special figure variation display game, as shown in FIG. 93 (g), the main display symbol and the sub display symbol are exchanged to display the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85 and the second decoration game display unit 88. The display of the above is replaced, and as shown in FIG. 93 (h), the special result is displayed on the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85, and the game shifts to the special game state.

Both the main display symbol and the sub display symbol are in the state where the special symbol variation display game is being executed, the sub display symbol ends before the main display symbol, and the result of the sub display symbol is a special result. However, if the execution condition of the skip effect is not satisfied, the display as shown in FIGS. 93 (e) to 93 (h) is performed without performing the skip effect.

FIG. 94 shows a time chart when the skip effect shown in FIG. 93 is executed. Regarding the main display symbol and the effect, the upper part shows the case where the effect button 25 is pressed in the skip effect (FIGS. 93 (c) and (d)), and the lower part shows the case where the effect button 25 is not pressed in the skip effect. Cases (FIGS. 93 (e) to (h)) are shown.

Here, first, both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are being executed, so that the special figure 2 variable display game has a special result and ends before the special figure 1 variable display game. It has become. Then, in a state where the main variable symbol is the special figure 1 variable display game and the sub variable symbol is the special figure 2 variable display game, the game is skipped when the remaining variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game, which is a special result, reaches a predetermined time. The production is started (t11). This predetermined time is 3000 ms, which is the maximum execution time (t11 to t13) of the skip effect, and when the effect button is not pressed in the skip effect, the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85 stops the identification information due to the deviation result. It is 1000 ms, which is the time required for the operation (t13 to t14), and the combined time (4000 ms).

When the skip effect (specific period) is started, the press instruction effect for displaying the instruction display 94 and the operation period display 93 is started (t11, FIG. 93 (b)). Then, when the effect button 25 is pressed in the skip effect (t12), the main variation symbol and the sub-variation symbol are exchanged, and the decoration special symbol variation display corresponding to the main variation symbol is displayed. The game is temporarily stopped, and the skip effect is terminated (FIG. 93 (c)). The state of temporary stop continues until the special figure 2 variable display game stops with a special result (t14).

After that, as the special figure 2 variable display game stops with a special result, the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped with a missed result even if the planned fluctuation time (until t17) has not been reached. (T14, FIG. 93 (d)). The decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85 ends the temporarily stopped state, and stops and displays the identification information for the stop time of the special figure variation display game (t14 to t16). In addition, the second decorative game display unit 88 stops and displays the out-of-order result corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game which is a sub-variable symbol. Then, the special gaming state is started with the end of the stop time (t16).

On the other hand, when the effect button 25 is not pressed in the skip effect, the skip effect (specific period) ends with the end of the maximum execution time of the skip effect (t13, FIG. 93 (e)), and the decorative special figure variation display. A variation effect for stopping the variation display of the game display unit 85 is performed (t13 to t14). In this variation effect, the identification information is stopped in the order of the left variation display area, the right variation display area, and the middle variation display area, as in the case of displaying the normal deviation result.

Then, with the start of the stop time of the special figure variation display game, the deviation result is stopped and displayed on the decoration special figure variation display game display unit 85, and the special result is displayed on the second decoration game display unit 88 (t14, FIG. 93). (F)). After that, the display of the decorative special figure variable display game display unit 85 and the display of the second decorative game display unit 88 are exchanged (t15, FIG. 93 (g)), and the special result is stopped at the decorative special figure variable display game display unit 85. It is displayed, and the deviation result is displayed on the second decorative game display unit 88. Then, the special gaming state is started with the end of the stop time (t16).

The time (t14 to t15) for stopping and displaying the deviation result on the decoration special figure variation display game display unit 85 and displaying the special result on the second decoration game display unit 88 is shifted on the special figure variation display game display unit 85. If the time is the same as the time when the result is displayed, it is possible to give an impression as if the result was out of order, and the interest when it is shown to be a special result is improved. In addition, it is possible to have a sense of expectation that the special result will change even when the special figure variation display game of the deviation result is actually finished.

Further, in the skip effect, when the display of the decorative special figure variable display game display unit 85 and the display of the second decorative game display unit 88 are exchanged, the effect of showing the state of movement as shown in FIG. 92 is not performed. However, it is also possible to show that the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the sub-display symbol has stopped by performing an effect showing the state of movement. Further, when the effect button 25 is temporarily stopped, the display of the decorative special figure variable display game display unit 85 and the display of the second decorative game display unit 88 are not exchanged, and the decorative special figure variable display game display unit 85 is used. The disengagement result may be temporarily stopped, and then the display of the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85 and the display of the second decorative game display unit 88 may be exchanged.

Further, as shown in FIG. 93 (c), after the special result is temporarily stopped by the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85, a fanfare effect at the start of the special game state is performed before the special figure variation display game ends. You may. In this case, the temporary stop time may be set to the same time as the stop time when the result of the special figure variation display game becomes a special result.

Further, although FIGS. 93 and 94 show the case where the result is a big hit, the skip effect can be similarly executed even when the result is a small hit. In this case, the result mode displayed on the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85 as a result of the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game that is a small hit may be a result mode indicating a small hit. It may be a result mode showing the loss.

[Main processing]
In order to control the display on the display device 41 as described above, the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 performs the main process shown in FIG. 95 and the timer interrupt process (not shown). In the main process, the process at the start of the program is performed first. In the process at the start of this program, interrupts are first disabled (step C1), and the CPU is initially set (step C2). Next, the initial setting of VDP312 is performed (step C3), and interrupts are enabled (step C4). Next, the generation of display data is permitted (step C5), a random number seed is set (step C6), and the initial value at the time of power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, the power failure detection detected flag and the like are cleared.

After performing the processing at the start of the program in steps C1 to C7, the loop processing is performed as the main loop processing. In this loop processing, first, the WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, the effect button input process (step C9) for creating input information from the input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is performed. The input from the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is read in the timer interrupt process, and in this effect button input process, the process when there is an input from the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is performed.

Then, the hall / player setting mode processing for receiving operations such as setting the changeable range of the brightness and volume of the LED and the liquid crystal and changing the brightness and the volume of the LED and the liquid crystal by the player is performed (step C10). Next, a random number update process (step C11) for updating a random number that determines the details of the variation mode of the decorative special figure variation display game is performed.

Next, a reception command check process (step C12) that analyzes commands from the game control device 100 and responds to them is performed, and an effect display editing process (step C13) that edits settings and drawing commands for controlling the progress of the effect is performed. ) To set the end of preparation for the drawing command (step C14). In these processes, various data are updated according to the contents to be drawn, and the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer. If the drawing data of the screen to be drawn within 1/30 second (about 33.3 msec) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

Then, it is determined whether or not it is the frame switching timing (step C15). In the present embodiment, since the system cycle (1 frame 1/30 second) is created, it is determined that the frame switching timing is reached when the V blank interrupt (1/60 second) is inserted twice. The frame switching timing can be changed as appropriate. For example, the image may be updated (frame switching) in 1/60 seconds, or the image may be updated (frames) at a timing later than 1/60 seconds. (Switching) may be performed. If it is determined in step C15 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C15; N), the process of step C15 is repeated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step C15 that it is the frame switching timing (step C15; Y), screen drawing is instructed (step C16).

After that, a sound control process (step C17) that controls the output of sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b), and a decoration control process that controls LEDs such as the panel decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18 (step). C18), the movable body control process (step C19) for controlling the motor and the solenoid of the board effect device 44 is performed. Then, a skip effect process for performing a process related to the skip effect is performed (step C19), a display switching process for switching between the main variable symbol and the sub variable symbol is performed (step C20), and the WDT is cleared (step C8). Return.

[Skip effect processing]
FIG. 96 shows a skip effect process (step C19) in the above-mentioned main process. In this skip effect process, first, it is determined whether or not there is a skip effect flag set during execution of the skip effect (step C41). If there is a skip effect flag (step C41; Y), that is, if the skip effect is being executed, the process proceeds to step C49. Further, when there is no skip effect flag (step C41; N), it is determined whether the simultaneous fluctuation is in progress, that is, whether both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are in the variable display. (Step C42).

If the simultaneous fluctuation is not in progress (step C42; N), the skip effect processing is terminated. In this case, the skip effect is not set. Further, when the simultaneous fluctuation is in progress (step C42; Y), it is determined whether or not the sub-display symbol is a hit (step C43). Here, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure variation display game of the special figure currently set as the sub display symbol is a hit. The hit includes both a big hit and a small hit, but only one of them may be used.

If the sub-display symbol does not hit (step C43; N), the skip effect process ends. When the sub-display symbol is a hit (step C43; Y), it is determined whether the sub-display symbol stops first (step C44). Here, the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation display game of the main fluctuation symbol is compared with the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation display game of the sub-variation symbol, and the special symbol of the sub-variation symbol is featured. Figure It is determined whether the remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation display game is shorter. That is, it is determined whether or not the special figure variation display game of the special symbol of the sub-variable symbol that is a hit ends first and the special figure variation display game of the special symbol of the main variable symbol is forcibly stopped as a result of the loss.

If the sub-display symbol does not stop first (step C44; N), the skip effect process ends. Further, when the sub-display symbol is stopped first (step C44; Y), it is determined whether the remaining fluctuation time is a predetermined time (step C45). Here, the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game of the special symbol of the sub-variation symbol is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the remaining fluctuation time is a predetermined time. As shown in FIG. 94, this predetermined time is 3000 ms, which is the maximum execution time of the skip effect (t11 to t13 in FIG. 94), and the decorative special figure variation display game when the effect button is not pressed in the skip effect. The display unit 85 is a total time (4000 ms) of 1000 ms, which is the time required to stop the identification information due to the deviation result (t13 to t14 in FIG. 94).

If the remaining fluctuation time is not a predetermined time (step C45; N), the skip effect processing is terminated. When the remaining fluctuation time is a predetermined time (step C45; Y), a skip effect is set (step C46). As a result, the pressing instruction effect for displaying the instruction display 94 and the operation period display 93 is started. Next, the skip effect flag is set (step C47), and the initial value is set in the skip effect timer (step C48). The initial value set here is a value corresponding to the maximum execution time of the skip effect (t11 to t13 in FIG. 94).

After that, if the skip effect timer is not 0, the skip effect timer is updated by -1 (step C49), and it is determined whether the skip effect timer has become 0 (step C50). If the skip effect timer is not 0 (step C50; N), the skip effect process ends. Further, when the skip effect timer becomes 0 (step C50; Y), that is, when the maximum execution time elapses without pressing the effect button 25 in the skip effect, the skip effect ends (step C51). The skip effect flag is cleared (step C52), and the skip effect process ends.

[Display switching process]
FIG. 97 shows the display switching process (step C20) in the above-mentioned main process. In this display switching process, first, it is determined whether or not there has been a switching operation between the main display symbol and the sub display symbol (step C61). Here, the switching operation is a single pressing of the effect button 25, but the operation mode of the switching operation can be arbitrarily set. It is also possible to operate the touch panel 29.

When there is a switching operation (step C61; N), it is determined whether the simultaneous fluctuation is in progress, that is, whether both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are in the variable display (step). C62).

If the simultaneous fluctuation is not in progress (step C62; N), the display switching process ends. Further, when the simultaneous fluctuation is in progress (step C62; Y), it is determined whether or not there is a switching permission flag (step C63). The switching permission flag is a flag set in a state in which the main display symbol and the sub display symbol can be switched according to the switching operation. If this switching permission flag is not present (step C63; N), the display switching process ends. If there is a switching permission flag (step C63; Y), it is determined whether or not there is a skip effect flag set during execution of the skip effect (step C64).

When there is no skip effect flag (step C64; N), the main display symbol is changed (step C70), the effect at the time of switching is set (step C71), and the display switching process is ended. As a result, the main display symbol and the sub display symbol can be switched, and the effect at the time of switching as shown in FIG. 92 is performed.

On the other hand, when there is a skip effect flag (step C64; Y), that is, when the skip effect is being executed, the main display symbol is changed and the changed main display symbol is temporarily stopped (step C65). As a result, as shown in FIG. 93 (c), the decorative special figure variation display displayed on the second decorative game display unit 88 corresponding to the special figure variation display game of the special figure which was used as the sub display symbol. The game is displayed on the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85, and the result is temporarily stopped.

After that, the switching permission flag is cleared (step C66), the skip effect flag is cleared (step C67), the skip effect timer is cleared (step C68), and the display switching process is completed. By clearing the switching permission flag, the state in which the result is temporarily stopped is maintained on the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85, and it is possible to make it appear as if the game is finished and the result mode is displayed. In addition, the skip effect ends by clearing the skip effect flag and the skip effect timer. The switching permission flag is set again at the start of a new special figure variation display game.

If there is no switching operation (step C61; N), it is determined whether the switching condition is satisfied (step C69). The switching condition here is when the special symbol variation display game of the main display symbol is not executed and only the special symbol variation display game of the sub display symbol is executed, or the special symbol variation display of the sub display symbol is executed. The establishment of conditions related to the progress of the game, such as when the game has a special result, can be mentioned. Of course, other conditions may be used, for example, when the reach state is reached only by the sub-display symbol. If this switching condition is not satisfied (step C69; N), the display switching process ends. When the switching condition is satisfied (step C69; Y), the main display symbol is changed (step C70), the effect at the time of switching is set (step C71), and the display switching process is terminated.

In the skip effect process shown in FIG. 96, steps C42 to C45 are mentioned as conditions for setting the skip effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a lottery may be performed as to whether or not to execute the skip effect. Further, it may be a condition for setting the skip effect that the reach effect or the specific effect is not executed in the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the main variable symbol. Further, when one of the main variation symbol and the sub-variation symbol is a hit, the special symbol that is a hit may be forcibly changed to the sub-variation symbol to perform the skip effect.

Further, the skip effect may be executed not only when the sub display symbol is a hit but also when the main display symbol is a hit and the sub display symbol is stopped before the sub display symbol. In this case, the skip effect may be performed even if the result of the main display symbol is off, or the skip effect may be executed when the variation pattern without reach is selected. Further, in the skip effect, the result is temporarily stopped immediately in response to the operation of the effect button 25, but the identification information may be sequentially stopped within a predetermined time in response to the operation of the effect button 25. That is, it may be produced as if the fluctuation time was shortened.

Further, basically, the main display symbol and the sub display symbol can always be exchanged, but it may be possible to exchange only when the skip effect is executed. Further, the setting of the main display symbol can be arbitrarily determined, but for example, when the power is turned on with RAM clear, it is set to special figure 1. However, if the change of the special figure 2 is started first after that, only the special figure 2 is changed, so that the main display symbol is changed to the special figure 2. In addition, after the end of the special game state, the special figure from which the special result that triggered the execution of the special game state is derived is used as the main display symbol.

Further, when the reach state is started in the decorative special figure variation display game of the second decoration game display unit 88, the main variation symbol and the sub variation symbol may be automatically exchanged. In this case, it may be a condition to replace that the decorative special figure variable display game of the decorative special figure variable display game display unit 85 is not in the reach state. Further, the fluctuation patterns of the main display symbol and the sub display symbol may be compared, and the one with a high possibility of a special result may be set as the main display symbol. In this case, if one of them has a special result, the special figure variation display game that has the special result may be used as the main display symbol regardless of the fluctuation pattern, or the special figure variation display that has the special result may be used. The game may be used as a sub-display symbol to enable execution of a skip effect.

Further, the display mode in the display device 41 is not limited to that described above. For example, in the present embodiment, the display of the decorative special figure variable display game display unit 85 corresponding to the main display symbol is displayed larger than the display of the second decorative game display unit 88 corresponding to the sub display symbol. As shown in (a), both may be displayed in the same size, or the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the sub-display symbol may not be displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 98 (b), the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the main display symbol and the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the sub display symbol may be displayed in an overlapping manner. In this case, a part may be overlapped or all may be overlapped. In addition, the decorative special symbol variation display game corresponding to the main display symbol is displayed so as to overlap the decorative special symbol variation display game corresponding to the sub display symbol.

Further, as shown in FIG. 98 (b), the color of the identification information of the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the main display symbol and the color of the identification information of the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the sub display symbol are different. May be. Here, the color of the identification information of the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the sub-display symbol located at the rear is made lighter than the color of the identification information of the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the main display symbol. In addition to this, the identification information itself may be different between the main display symbol and the sub display symbol.

In addition, the reach effect is performed only for the decorative special symbol variable display game corresponding to the main display symbol, but if both the main display symbol and the sub display symbol are in the reach state, both reach effects are displayed. You may try to do it. In this case, as shown in FIG. 98 (c), the screen may be divided so that the reach effects can be executed by both sides, or the reach effects of both sides may be displayed in an overlapping manner.

Further, the reach effects of both may be integrated to show the result of the special figure variation display game of both in the production of one story. For example, as shown in FIGS. 98 (d) to 98 (g), in a battle effect of fighting an enemy character, the result of the battle is derived according to the result derivation of each special figure variation display game, and the special figure variation display game The result may be shown.

As shown in FIG. 98 (d), a reach effect that integrates the reach effects of both sides is started based on the fact that the reach state is reached in both special figure variation display games. Here, the special figure variation display game of the main display symbol ends first, and in FIG. 98 (d), the battle corresponding to this special figure variation display game is started as the first game, and FIG. 98 (e) The result is displayed as shown in. The result of this special figure variation display game is an out-of-order result, and the result of the battle is a draw.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 98 (f), a battle corresponding to the special figure variation display game of the sub-display symbol is started as the second game, and the result is displayed as shown in FIG. 98 (g). The result of this special figure variation display game is a special result, and the result of the battle is the victory of the ally character. It should be noted that such an effect is not limited to the case where both are in the reach state, and can be executed even when one or both are not in the reach state. Also in the examples shown in FIGS. 98 (a) to 98 (g), the display unit is different between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 in the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85 and the second decorative game display unit 88. You can do it, or you can keep it different.

From the above, when a variable display game in which identification information is variablely displayed based on a prize in the starting winning opening is executed and the result of the variable display game becomes a special result, a special gaming state advantageous to the player is obtained. In the game machine to be generated, the first start winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening (normal variable winning device 37, second starting winning opening 97) are provided as starting winning openings, and the first starting winning opening is provided. Variable display based on the winning of the game ball The variable display based on the first variable display game execution control means (game control device 100) capable of executing the first variable display game as a game and the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening. A second variable display game execution control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a second variable display game as a game, a display device 41 capable of displaying an effect related to the game, and an effect control means (effect) for controlling the effect of the game. A control device 300) is provided, and the first variable display game and the second variable display game can be executed at the same time, and the effect control means is a variable display game of one of the first variable display game and the second variable display game. Is mainly displayed on the display device 41, and the variable display game to be mainly displayed can be changed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. Therefore, it is possible to select the special figure variation display game mainly displayed by the player on the gaming machine capable of executing different special figure variation display games at the same time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Here, in order to satisfy the predetermined condition, in addition to the operation of the operation means (effect button 25, touch panel 29) that can be operated by the player, the special figure variation display game of the main display symbol is not executed and the sub-display is performed. There are cases where only the special symbol variation display game of the symbol is executed, or when the special symbol variation display game of the sub-display symbol has a special result, and the conditions related to the progress of the game are satisfied. Of course, other conditions may be used, for example, when the reach state is reached only by the sub-display symbol.

Further, the game ball flowing into the predetermined inflow port 91 is provided with a distribution means (winning device 90) for alternately distributing the game ball to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening. Therefore, there is a high possibility that the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are executed at the same time, and the interest of the game can be improved by allowing the player to select the special figure variable display game mainly to be displayed.

When the first variable display game execution control means (game control device 100) controls the execution of the first variable display game, the execution control is performed by the second variable display game execution control means (game control device 100). When the second variable display game being played has the special result, the first variable display game performing the execution control can be terminated as a result other than the special result, and the second variable display game can be terminated. The execution control means controls the execution of the second variable display game, and when the first variable display game whose execution is controlled by the first variable display game execution control means has a special result, It is possible to end the second variable display game performing the execution control as a result other than the special result, and the effect control means (effect control device 300) includes the first variable display game and the second variable display game. When the results of the variable display game from which the result is derived first become a special result when they are executed at the same time, the timing at which the result is derived in the variable display game from which the result is derived first is determined. In a specific period set between the time before and the timing when the result is derived, it is possible to change the variable display game mainly displayed based on the satisfaction of the predetermined conditions. Therefore, when the result of one of the special figure variation display games is derived, the special figure variation display game mainly displayed by the player can be selected, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, the effect control means (effect control device 300) temporarily stops the identification information corresponding to the variable display game that is mainly displayed after the change, based on the establishment of the predetermined condition in the specific period. Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect as if the special figure variation display game was stopped based on the operation of the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, when the effect control means (effect control device 300) changes the variable display game to be mainly displayed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition in a specific period, the variable display game is mainly displayed until at least the end of the variable display game. It will be prohibited to change. Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect as if the special figure variation display game was stopped based on the operation of the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[First modification]
Next, a first modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. It should be noted that basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof is omitted, and the description is mainly different. The part will be described. In the gaming machine of this modification, it is possible to select a variation pattern for executing the skip effect in the gaming control device 100.

99 and 100 show fluctuation patterns of the special figure fluctuation display game. FIG. 99 shows the contents of the fluctuation pattern table in which the types and selectivity of fluctuation patterns in the normal gaming state (low probability state) are defined. A variation pattern table common to the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game is used. 99 (a) to 99 (c) are the same as those of FIGS. 8 (a) to 8 (c) of the first embodiment. The gaming machine of this modification includes the big hit variation pattern table 2 shown in FIG. 99 (d) and the small hit variation pattern table 2 shown in FIG. 99 (e).

The jackpot fluctuation pattern table 1 of FIG. 99 (b) and the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 2 of FIG. 99 (d) are different in that the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 2 of FIG. 99 (d) has a variation pattern without reach. Similarly, in the small hit variation pattern table 1 of FIG. 99 (c) and the small hit variation pattern table 2 of FIG. 99 (e), the small hit variation pattern table 2 of FIG. 99 (e) has a variation pattern without reach. The point is different.

FIG. 100 shows the contents of the fluctuation pattern table in which the types and selection rates of the fluctuation patterns in the specific gaming state (high probability state) are defined. A variation pattern table common to the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game is used. 100 (a) to 100 (c) are the same as those of FIGS. 9 (a) to 9 (c) of the first embodiment. The gaming machine of this modified example includes a large hit variation pattern table 2 shown in FIG. 100 (d) and a small hit variation pattern table 2 shown in FIG. 100 (e).

The jackpot fluctuation pattern table 1 of FIG. 100 (b) and the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 2 of FIG. 100 (d) are different in that the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 2 of FIG. 100 (d) has a variation pattern without reach. Similarly, in the small hit variation pattern table 1 of FIG. 100 (c) and the small hit variation pattern table 2 of FIG. 100 (e), the small hit variation pattern table 2 of FIG. 100 (e) has a variation pattern without reach. The point is different.

The variation pattern table 2 shown in FIGS. 99 (d), (e), 100 (d), and (e) can be selected when the other special figure variation display game is being executed. In this situation, the ability to select a short-time fluctuation pattern without reach increases the possibility that the winning special figure fluctuation display game will stop before the other special figure fluctuation display game, resulting in a skip effect. It is easy to execute.

Further, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern without reach is set to 4000 ms. As shown in FIG. 94, this fluctuation time is 3000 ms, which is the maximum execution time of the skip effect (t11 to t13 in FIG. 94), and the decorative special figure variation display game when the effect button is not pressed in the skip effect. The display unit 85 is a time equal to the total time (4000 ms) of 1000 ms, which is the time required to stop the identification information due to the deviation result (t13 to t14 in FIG. 94).

When this variation pattern is selected, the effect control device 300 immediately starts the skip effect with the start of the special figure variation display game. Further, when this variation pattern is selected and the skip effect is performed, but the effect button 25 is not operated, the special result is stopped in the stop mode in which the identification information is stopped as in the case of the disengagement result. To be done. As a result, if the special figure for which the variation pattern is selected is the main variation symbol, the skip effect is started in a state where the identification information is fluctuating at high speed on the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85.

[Special figure information setting process]
In the gaming machine of the present modification, the special figure information setting process shown in FIG. 101 is performed instead of the special figure information setting process shown in FIG. 48. In this special figure information setting process, when the result is a big hit or a small hit (step Y404; Y, step Y405; Y, step Y414; N) in either the low probability state or the high probability state, the other It is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation display game of No. 1 is changing (step Y415).

If the other special figure variation display game is not changing (step Y415; N), the process proceeds to step Y412. When the other special figure variation display game is changing (step Y415; Y), it is determined whether the remaining variation time of the other special figure variation display game is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (step Y416). As shown in FIG. 94, this predetermined time includes the maximum execution time of the skip effect (t11 to t13 in FIG. 94) and the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85 when the effect button is not pressed in the skip effect. Then, it is the total time of the time required to stop the identification information (t13 to t14 in FIG. 94) based on the deviation result.

If the remaining fluctuation time of the other special figure variation display game is not equal to or longer than the predetermined time (step Y416; N), the process proceeds to step Y412.
When the remaining fluctuation time of the other special figure fluctuation display game is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (step Y416; Y), the conversion value to the table 2 is added to the first half offset data to convert the value (step Y417). , The conversion value to the table 2 is added to the latter half offset data to convert the value (step Y418), and the process proceeds to step Y412.

As a result, the fluctuation pattern table 2 of FIGS. 99 (d), (e), 100 (d), and (e) is set according to the probability state and the result in the situation where the skip effect can be executed. .. In these fluctuation pattern tables 2, fluctuation patterns with a fluctuation time of 4000 ms can be selected without reach.

Even if the other special figure variation display game is not changing (step Y415; N) or the remaining variation time of the other special figure variation display game is not more than a predetermined time (step Y416; N). If there is a start memory of the other, the other special figure variation display game may be continuously executed, so that the process may be shifted to step Y416. Further, in the variation pattern table 2 shown in FIGS. 99 (d), (e), 100 (d), and (e), only the variation pattern without reach may be selectable.

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the above-described embodiment as the gaming machine, and is not limited to, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, and the like. It is applicable to all gaming machines that use the gaming ball of. It is also possible to apply the present invention to slot machines. This slot machine is not limited to a slot machine that uses medals, and includes, for example, all slot machines such as a slot machine that uses a game ball. Further, the configurations of the above-described modifications can be applied in combination as appropriate.

In addition, the embodiments disclosed this time should be considered to be exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and it is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

10 Pachinko machine 36 1st start winning opening 37 Ordinary variable winning device (2nd starting winning opening)
41 Display device 90 Winning device (sorting means)
91 Inflow port 97 Second start winning opening 100 Game control device (first variable display game execution control means, second variable display game execution control means)
300 Production control device (Production control means)

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine that executes a variable display game that fluctuates and displays identification information based on a prize in the start winning opening, and generates a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result. ,
A game control means capable of executing the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening, and
Based on the control command from the game control means, the first decorative variation display game corresponding to the variation display game and the effect control means capable of displaying the second decoration variation display game on the display device are provided.
The game control means acquires a variation pattern table, selects a variation pattern from the acquired variation pattern table, and selects a variation pattern.
The variation pattern table used for selecting the variation pattern of the variation display game, which is a specific effect state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, has a higher reach than the variation pattern table used for selecting the variation pattern of the variation display game, which is not in the specific effect state. It is assumed that the selection rate of the fluctuation pattern that does not perform the production is high.
When a variation pattern that does not perform the reach effect is selected from the variation pattern table used for selecting the variation pattern of the variation display game that is in the specific effect state, the effect control means causes the player to operate the operation means. The instruction display for intervening in the production is performed, and the second decoration variation display game is displayed on the second display based on the operation of the operation means in the state where the second decoration variation display game is displayed on the second display unit. is without effect for moving the first display portion from part to display the results of the second decorative variation display game on the first display portion, the second ornament variable display games subsequently displayed on the first display unit gaming machine, wherein a result from the first display portion is not moved to the second display unit.

Images